JP5133077B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention includes an ordinary variable display means for variably displaying identification information and deriving and displaying a display result, and a variable start winning device that changes between an open state in which a game medium can be won and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be won. , Special variable display means for variably displaying the special identification information based on the winning of the game medium in the variable start winning device, and displaying the display result, the open state where the game medium can be won, and the game medium cannot be won A special variable winning device that changes to a closed state, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the normal variable display means, the variable start winning device is changed to the open state, and the predetermined display result is displayed on the special variable display means. The special variable prize-winning device is changed to an open state based on the derivation and display, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the fact that the game medium has won the special variable prize-winning device. It relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are prizes (prize balls) ) Is paid to the player. Furthermore, when a predetermined specific display mode (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable symbol special display that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. In addition, there is a gaming machine that shifts to a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening (one of the winning areas) is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times), and the game state shifts to a specific gaming state where it is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening is referred to as a round.

  In addition, as a gaming machine, a variable winning ball apparatus (an accessory) is provided that performs an operation from a closed state in which a gaming ball cannot be won to an open state in which a gaming ball can be won when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game state is configured to shift to the specific game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area (also referred to as “V prize area”) (also referred to as “V prize area”). There is a gaming machine. In the specific game state, generally, the accessory with the movable member is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times), and after the game ball enters the accessory and passes through the route member provided in the accessory. When entering the winning area, a prize ball is paid out. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the movable member is closed.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest in games .

The gaming machine according to the present invention performs normal display of identification information (for example, a normal symbol, first decorative symbol) and derives and displays a display result (for example, a normal symbol display 10. 1 decorative symbol display area 9a), a variable start winning device (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 61) that changes between an open state in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can be won and a closed state in which a game medium cannot be won. ) , Special variable display means for variably displaying the special identification information based on the winning of the game media in the variable start winning device and displaying the display result, and the open state in which the game media can be won and the game media wins and a special variable winning device which changes a non closed, normally variable display means specific display results (e.g., Hiroshizu per symbol) open a variable start winning device when a derived displayed Varied, special with variable display means predetermined display result changes the special variable winning device in the open state based on the derived display, predetermined based on the game medium has been finished in the special variable winning devices game A gaming machine capable of giving value, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and an electrical component for production according to a command transmitted by the game control means (for example, Effect display means 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a, 28b, 28c) for controlling the effect display means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100), the game control means that the start condition is satisfied (for example, gate 32 based on the game ball has passed), and whether a specific display results display results derived displayed on the ordinary variable display means Is determined before the display result is derived, and when it is determined that the display result is a specific display result, the variable start winning device is in an open state in a manner in which the game medium is easy to win (for example, per long map). Or a pre-determining means (for example, a game control micro) that determines whether or not the second open state (for example, per short map) is set in an open state in a manner that makes it difficult for a game medium to win a prize. A portion of the computer 560 that executes step S128) and a variable display pattern of a plurality of types of identification information that are determined in advance based on the determination by the pre-determining means (for example, a variable map pattern). Variable display pattern determining means for determining (for example, a part of step S101 in the game control microcomputer 560) ), A display result command (for example, commands BC00 (H) to BC02 (H)) that can specify the determination result by the predetermination unit, and a variable display that can specify the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit A pattern command (for example, a usual figure variation pattern command (B000 (H) to B033 (H)) and a winning command (for example, a special figure variation pattern command (8000) that can specify that the game medium has won the variable start winning device). (H) to 805C (H)) (for example, a part for executing steps S198, S342, and S29 in the game control microcomputer 560). Production execution means for executing production based on the transmitted command (for example, production system The command transmission means is determined to be the specific display result by the pre-decision means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state. A common winning command is transmitted when it is determined by the pre-determining means that the specific display result is determined and when the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a long player). Regardless of the case of the normal map or the case of the short normal map, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command (8000 (H) to 805C (H)) is transmitted) and the effect execution means are transmitted by the command transmission means. Based on the winning command, if the specific display result is determined by the pre-determining means Common when the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state and when it is determined by the predetermining means to be the specific display result and when the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs step S8206 after Y in step S8201 regardless of the case of the long normal map and the case of the short normal map. (S8309, S8310, S8356, S8357 are executed).

Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a normal variable display means (for example, the normal symbol display 10. Effect display) that variably displays the identification information (for example, the normal symbol, the first decorative symbol) and derives and displays the display result. The first decorative symbol display area 9a) in the device 9 and a variable start winning device (for example, normally variable) that changes between an open state in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can be won and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be won. A winning ball device 61) , special variable display means for variably displaying special identification information based on the winning of the game medium in the variable start winning device and deriving and displaying the display result, and an open state in which the game medium can be won. and a special variable winning devices game medium is changed to a non-closed state winning, ordinary variable display means specific display results (e.g., Hiroshizu per symbol) variable starting winning device when a derived displayed Is changed to the open state, the changing the special variable winning devices based on the special variable display means predetermined display result was derived displayed in an open state, based on the game medium to the special variable winning device is won A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined game value, a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and an electrical component for presentation according to a command transmitted by the game control means (For example, an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c) and the game control means that the start condition is satisfied ( for example, based on the gate 32 that the game ball has passed), specific display results display results derived displayed on the ordinary variable display means Whether or not to display the display result is determined before the display result is derived, and when it is determined that the display result is a specific display result, the first start state (for example, long A pre-determining means (for example, prior to derivation display of the display result) (for example, per short map) or to determine whether the second open state (for example, per short general map) is set in an open state in a manner in which it is difficult to win a game medium. A part for executing step S128 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a variable display pattern of a plurality of types of identification information determined in advance based on the determination by the pre-determining means (for example, a common pattern variation pattern). Variable display pattern determining means for determining two variable display patterns (for example, step S101 in the game control microcomputer 560 is executed). A display result command (for example, commands BC00 (H) to BC02 (H)) that can specify the determination result by the predetermining means, and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means can be specified. Variable display pattern commands (e.g., universal variation pattern commands (B000 (H) to B033 (H)) and the variable start winning device when the variable start winning device is controlled to be in the open state, the game medium wins the variable start winning device. A command transmission means (for example, a game) that transmits a non-winning command (for example, a normal pattern variation pattern command (B000 (H) to B033 (H)) to be transmitted in the next normal symbol variation display) that can be identified. The control microcomputer 560 executes the steps S198 and S29), and the effect control means includes a command Including an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the command transmitted by the communication means (for example, a part for executing step S705 in the effect control microcomputer 100). When the game medium has not won the variable start winning device when the variable start winning device is controlled to the open state based on the determination that the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state. And when the variable start winning device is controlled to be in the open state based on the determination of the specific display result by the predetermining means and the determination that the variable start winning device is in the second open state. A common non-winning command is sent when the variable start winning device is not won (for example, Regardless of the case of the long normal figure or the case of the short normal figure, the technique control microcomputer 560 does not win the start, and the normal figure change pattern command (B000 at the start of the next normal symbol change start). (H) to B033 (H)) are transmitted), and the effect execution means is determined to be the specific display result by the pre-decision means, and based on the determination that the variable start winning device is to be in the first open state. When the variable start winning device is controlled to be in the open state, it is determined that the game medium has not won the variable start winning device, and the specific display result is determined by the predetermining means, and the variable start winning device is opened second. The game medium does not win the variable start winning device when the variable start winning device is controlled to be in the open state based on the determined state. In this case, a common effect (for example, an effect symbol change display executed in synchronization with the next normal symbol change display) is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided for a long normal pattern. Steps S8056 to S8062, S8101 to S8115, and S8154 are executed based on the reception of the next normal pattern variation pattern command regardless of the case and the case of the short normal map).

Still another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a normal variable display means (for example, a normal symbol display device 10) that variably displays identification information (for example, a normal symbol; a first decorative symbol) and derives and displays a display result. The first decorative symbol display area 9a) on the display device 9 and a variable start winning device (e.g., normal) that changes between an open state in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can win and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be won. A variable winning ball device 61) , special variable display means for variably displaying special identification information based on the winning of game media in the variable start winning device, and deriving and displaying the display result, and an open state in which the game media can win. and game media is changed to a closed state can not winning a special variable winning devices, variable start input when certain display result on ordinary variable display unit (e.g., Hiroshizu per symbol) is derived displayed Device is changed to the open state, based on the special variable display means predetermined display result is derived displayed with changing the special variable winning device in the open state, that the game medium has been finished in the special variable winning devices A gaming machine that can be given a predetermined game value based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 560), and for the performance according to the command transmitted by the game control means It includes an effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the electrical components (for example, the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c), and the game control means satisfies the start condition. it (e.g., the gate 32 is a game ball that has passed through) the specific table display results based on, derived displayed on the ordinary variable display means Whether or not the result is determined before the display result derivation display, and when it is determined that the display result is a specific display result, the variable start winning device is opened in a manner in which the game medium is easy to win (for example, a first open state (for example, Pre-determining means for determining before the derivation display of the display result whether it is in the second open state (for example, per short general chart) in which the game medium is difficult to win or is in an open state in which the game medium is difficult to win. For example, a part for executing step S128 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a variable display pattern (for example, a general-purpose variation pattern) of a plurality of types of identification information determined in advance based on the determination by the predetermining means. Variable display pattern determination means (for example, step S10 in the game control microcomputer 560) that determines one variable display pattern from 1), a display result command (for example, commands BC00 (H) to BC02 (H)) that can specify the determination result by the predetermining unit, and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining unit. Variable display pattern commands that can be specified (for example, universal variation pattern commands (B000 (H) to B033 (H)) and winning commands that can specify that a game medium has won a variable start winning device (for example, a special figure) Command transmission means for transmitting variation pattern commands (8000 (H) to 805C (H)) (for example, a part for executing steps S198, S342, and S29 in the game control microcomputer 560), The effect execution means for executing the effect based on the command transmitted by the command transmission means For example, the command transmitting means determines that the specific display result is determined not to be a specific display result by the predetermining means and the specific display result is determined to be the specific display result by the predetermining means. When the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state, a common variable display pattern command is transmitted (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 causes the normal loss and the short normal transmission). Regardless of the winning case, the usual change pattern command for losing / shorting normal drawing shown in FIG. 30 is transmitted), and it is determined by the predetermining means as the specific display result and the variable start winning device is set to the second. When it is determined to be in the open state, the specific display result shall not be obtained by the predetermining means (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the command BC00 (H) shown in FIG. 37 in the case of a normal game loss). In the case of a short normal, the command BC01 (H) shown in FIG. 37 is transmitted), and the effect execution means is variable corresponding to the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means. The display effect is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8055 to S8062, S8101 to S8115, and S8154) and is determined to be the specific display result by the predetermining means, and the variable start winning device is the first. 2 Display result command that can specify that it is determined to be open When a winning command is received after reception, a special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 116 (2), fireworks rise and “Opportunity! (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8305, S8309, S8310, S8356, and S8357 when the result is Y in step S8251). To do.

  The gaming machine includes detection means (for example, a start port switch 60) that detects a game medium that has won a variable start winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 61) and outputs a detection signal. It includes an open state determining means (for example, a part for executing step S261 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not the variable start winning device is controlled to the open state, and the command transmitting means is an open state determining means. When it is determined that the variable start winning device is not controlled to the open state, an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the detection of the winning of the game medium by the detecting means ( For example, the start prize abnormality notification designation command is transmitted (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the game is executed in step S26). When the answer is N, step S265 is executed), and the effect control means executes abnormality notification based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100). The portion for executing S1008 to S1018) may be included.

  The variable display pattern determination means uses a variable display pattern type determination random number (for example, a universal pattern variation pattern type determination random number) to select any one of a plurality of variable display pattern types (for example, a universal pattern variation pattern type) of identification information. Pattern type determining means (for example, a part for executing step S194 in the game control microcomputer 560) and variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. , Pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that determines a variable display pattern (for example, a general pattern variation pattern) of identification information using a variable display pattern determination random number (for example, a general pattern variation pattern determination random number). To execute step S196 in FIG. It may be.

The gaming machine has variable display execution means (for example, a game) that executes variable display of identification information in the normal variable display means in response to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means based on the start condition being satisfied. A portion that executes steps S197 to S199, S271, and S272 in the control microcomputer 560. A portion that executes step S705A in the production control microcomputer 100) and a normal variable display means at the end of the variable display by the variable display execution means. Variable display result display control means for displaying the display result of variable display (for example, the portion of steps S273 to S278 and S151 to S160 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the specific display result determined by the predetermining means When done When the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state (for example, per short normal map), after the display of the variable display result by the variable display result display control means is finished, the variable start winning device is Variable start result award device opening control means (for example, a part for executing steps S163, S164, S170 to S173 in the game control microcomputer 560) that controls the variable display result display control means, When it is determined that the specific display result is not set by the pre-determining means, the display result of the variable display by the variable display result display control means is displayed for the first time (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is set in step S277). Processing of steps S151 and S152 until normal symbol losing symbol display time elapses When the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state, and the variable display result display control means, the variable display result display control means The display result of the variable display is displayed for the second time (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processes of steps S151 and S152 until the symbol display time per normal symbol set in step S276 elapses. The variable start winning device release control means displays the variable display result for the second time after the variable display result display control means displays the display result of the variable display for the second time. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 to be in an open state in step S164. After that, when the starting portion movable time 0.1 seconds set in step S163 has elapsed, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be closed in step S172), and the first time is the third time in the second time. It is set to approximately the same time as the time added (for example, as shown in FIG. 121, the symbol stop time at the time of the usual figure loss is the start prize opening (normal The variable winning ball apparatus 61) is set to be substantially the same as the time added with the opening control time).

Gaming machine, open display result on special variable display unit (e.g., Koatari symbol) with changing the special variable winning device in the open state when the derived displayed, a special variable winning device is controlled to open A specific game state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific area (for example, the specific prize opening 66A) among the plurality of areas provided in the special variable winning device. A variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information in the normal variable display means based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, for game control) A portion of the microcomputer 560 that executes steps S197 to S199, S271, and S272. And the variable display executing means based on the determination that the specific display result is determined by the predetermining means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state. Specific control execution means for executing specific control corresponding to the specific display result after the display is completed (for example, a part for executing steps S162, S164, S170 to S173 in the game control microcomputer 560), When executing variable display of identification information to be executed based on the determination that the specific display result is not to be determined by the following, after the variable display of the identification information is ended, the start condition is satisfied based on Variable identification information can be displayed (for example, a game control microcomputer The data 560 executes step S160 when the answer is N in step S153 to shift to the normal symbol normal process, and executes the process after step S125 when the answer is N in step S124 of the normal symbol normal process). When executing variable display of identification information to be executed based on the determination that the specific display result is determined by the means, after ending the variable display of the identification information, and further ending the specific control by the specific control execution means, Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the next identification information can be executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S173 and transitions to the normal symbol normal process, and the normal symbol normal processing is executed). When the answer is N in step S124 of the normal process, the processing after step S125 is executed). In a state where the game medium has not won the moving prize device, an effect corresponding to the specific control (for example, the left navigation effect) is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S8201 when N). (S8205 is executed), and after the open display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special identification-specific information based on the game medium winning in the variable start winning device, the special variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8306, S8309, S8310, S8356, and S8357 after Y in step S8201). When the production corresponding to the special variable winning device being controlled to the open state is finished When variable display of identification information is being executed by the variable display execution means, the determination result of the predetermination means for the variable display of the identification information being executed and the variable display result of the variable display time are derived and displayed. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8559 to S8565, S8707, and S8708 when the result is Y in step S8558) and executes the special effect. After that, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the next identification information is executed (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the special effect, in step S8721, after transitioning to the general-purpose losing display process, in step S8261). It may be configured to transition to a variation pattern command reception waiting process).

  The gaming machine controls the advantageous state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) that controls the advantageous state (for example, the short-time state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the end of the big hit game). And the predetermining means controls the variable start winning device with a higher probability when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means than when it is not controlled to the advantageous state. Even if it is configured to be determined to be in the first open state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S97 and S98 based on the type determination table per hour-speed map selected in step S95). Good.

Gaming machine, open display result on special variable display unit (e.g., Koatari symbol) with changing the special variable winning device in the open state when the derived displayed, a special variable winning device is controlled to open A specific game state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific area (for example, the specific prize opening 66A) among the plurality of areas provided in the special variable winning device. A variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information in the normal variable display means based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, for game control) A portion of the microcomputer 560 that executes steps S197 to S199, S271, and S272. And the variable display executing means based on the determination that the specific display result is determined by the predetermining means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state. Specific control execution means for executing specific control corresponding to the specific display result after the display is completed (for example, a part for executing steps S162, S164, S170 to S173 in the game control microcomputer 560), When executing variable display of identification information to be executed based on the determination that the specific display result is not to be determined by the following, after the variable display of the identification information is ended, the start condition is satisfied based on Variable identification information can be displayed (for example, a game control microcomputer The data 560 executes step S160 when the answer is N in step S153 to shift to the normal symbol normal process, and executes the process after step S125 when the answer is N in step S124 of the normal symbol normal process). When executing variable display of identification information to be executed based on the determination that the specific display result is determined by the means, after ending the variable display of the identification information, and further ending the specific control by the specific control execution means, Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the next identification information can be executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S173 and transitions to the normal symbol normal process, and the normal symbol normal processing is executed). The process after step S125 is executed when N in step S124 of the normal process). After controlling to the profit state, the advantageous state is ended based on the variable display of the special identification information being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the part for executing step S140 in the game control microcomputer 560). In a state that is not controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means, the effects corresponding to the variable display effect and the specific control (for example, the effect symbols shown in FIGS. 113, 114 and 115 (1) (3) to (5)) Fluctuation display. 115 (2) is executed (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8058, S8059, S8106, and S8107 using the process table selected in step S8055. Step S8158. Steps S8160 and S8205 are executed using the process table for the left navigation effect selected in step S8160). In the state controlled by the advantageous state control means, the variable display effect is not executed without executing the variable display effect. In addition, an effect-state effect in an advantageous state different from the effect corresponding to the specific control (for example, the effect at the chance time shown in FIGS. 117 and 118) is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects in step S8053). Process table for chance time Steps S8058, S8059, S8106, and S8107 are used to execute steps S8160 and S8205 using the process table for producing the left navigation at the chance time selected in step S8157). After the control, when the advantageous display in the advantageous state is finished based on the variable display of the special identification information for the predetermined number of times, if the variable display of the identification information is being executed by the variable display executing means, Different special effects are executed according to the determination result of the predetermining means for the variable display of the identification information and the remaining time until the variable display result of the variable display time is derived and displayed (for example, a microcomputer for effect control) 100 is a special figure after resetting the chance time flag in step S8479. When executing the shift display process, execute steps S8559 to S8565, S8707, and S8708 when Y is determined in step S8558), and after executing the special effect, execute the effect corresponding to the variable display of the next identification information. (For example, when the special effect is finished, the microcomputer 100 for effect control transitions to the general-purpose losing display process in step S8721 and then shifts to the variation pattern command reception waiting process in step S8261). Also good.

In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the interest in the game can be improved. Also, by sharing the winning command, the number of commands transmitted by the game control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the interest in the game can be improved. Also, by sharing the non-winning command, the number of commands transmitted by the game control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly recognizes that the game medium is likely to win the variable start winning device. Also, by sharing the variable display pattern command, the number of commands transmitted by the game control means can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by remembering surprising to Starring unloading.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 4, when the command transmission means determines that the variable start winning device is not controlled to the open state by the open state determination means, the detection of the game medium is detected by the detection means. Abnormality notification means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the notification, and the effect control means for executing abnormality notification based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the command transmission means Therefore, when an abnormal winning to the variable start winning device occurs, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality. In particular, there is a common variable display effect between the case where it is determined not to be the specific display result, and the case where it is determined that the variable start winning device is set to the second open state although it is determined as the specific display result. Even when it is executed, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality when it is determined that the variable start winning device does not have a specific display result without a game medium winning prize.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5, the variable display pattern determination unit determines the variable display pattern type of the identification information to be one of a plurality of types using a random number for variable display pattern type determination; Pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of identification information using a variable display pattern determining random number from among the variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. Even if various variable display patterns are provided, the selection rate of each variable display pattern can be determined by performing the variable display pattern determination process by a two-stage determination process using two random numbers. There can easily be designed to have a desired selectivity.

  In the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect, when the variable display result display control means determines that the specific display result is not set by the predetermining means, the display result of the variable display by the variable display result display control means is the first. When it is determined that the time is displayed and the specific display result is determined by the predetermining means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state, the display result of the variable display by the variable display result display control means is the second time. The variable start winning device opening control means displays the variable display result display control means for a second time after the variable display result display control means displays the display result of the variable display for a third time to the second opening state, Since the time is configured to be set to approximately the same time as the time obtained by adding the third time to the second time, the case where it is determined not to be the specific display result, Although the fixed display result is determined, the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state, and the variable display result is displayed even though the same variable display effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the different time.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 7, in the state where the game medium is not won in the variable start winning device, the effect executing means executes the effect corresponding to the specific control, and the game medium is won in the variable start winning device. After the opening display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special identification-specific information, the special variable winning device is configured to execute an effect corresponding to being controlled to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect on the part that the player is currently paying attention to in the game. In addition, when the effect execution means finishes the effect corresponding to the special variable winning device being controlled to be in the open state, if the variable display execution means is executing variable display of the identification information, execute Depending on the determination result of the pre-determining means for the variable display of the identification information and the remaining time until the variable display result of the variable display time is derived and displayed, the special effect is executed. After that, since the effect corresponding to the variable display of the next identification information is executed, the variable display of the special identification information and the effect for the special variable winning device being controlled to the open state, the identification Appropriate effect display can be performed also when switching to a state in which an effect for an effect corresponding to variable display of information and specific control is executed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 8 is provided with advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the predetermining means is controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means. Is configured to determine that the variable starting prize-winning device is in the first open state with a high probability compared to when it is not controlled to the advantageous state, without complicating the control, An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 9, when the effect execution means is not controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means, the effect corresponding to the variable display effect and the specific control is executed, and the advantageous state control means In the state controlled to the advantageous state, without executing the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the effect state effect different from the effect corresponding to the specific control are executed, and the advantageous state control means performs the advantageous state. If the variable display executing means is executing variable display of the identification information when the advantageous display in the advantageous state is terminated based on the variable display of the special identification information for the predetermined number of times after Depending on the determination result of the predetermining means for the variable display of the identification information and the remaining time until the variable display result of the variable display time is derived and displayed After the game is executed and the special effect is executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the next identification information is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous state is ended and the gaming state is switched to the non-advantaged state In addition, it is possible to perform appropriate presentation display.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 has a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 5 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 5. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 5 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the ball striking device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the game ball fired Enters the left area of the gaming area 7 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 5 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 7 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 5 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device, and to adjust the area into which the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  A variable winning ball apparatus 20 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 7. Further, on the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, there is provided an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 that forms a start winning opening. The start winning opening can be made when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in an open state (also referred to as an open state). In addition, the start winning opening becomes impossible when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is closed (also referred to as a closed state). It should be noted that when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the open state, it may be easier to win than when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the closed state. In addition, when the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is closed, the game ball is not completely unable to win, but compared to when the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is closed. It may be difficult. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening is detected by the start opening switch 60 and guided to the back of the game board 6.

  A special symbol display 8 as a variable display device that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided at the lower right in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the special symbol display 8 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  For variable display of special symbols, after the start condition, which is the execution condition of variable display, is satisfied (for example, the hit ball has won the start winning opening), the variable display start condition (for example, variable symbol variable display is executed) The game is started on the basis of the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying a symbol (an example of identification information).

  The small display is formed in a square shape. In addition, the special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Below the special symbol display 8 is a special symbol composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the starting winning opening, that is, the number of reserved memories (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting prize memory). A hold memory indicator 18 is provided. The special symbol storage memory display 18 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  When the game ball is won at the start winning opening and detected by the start opening switch 60 and a predetermined number (or symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. Be controlled. By opening / closing control, the open doors 76A and 76B provided above the variable winning ball apparatus 20 are interlocked and opened, so that the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is open and the open doors 76A and 76B are interlocked. By returning to the closed state, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed. The state in which the variable winning ball device 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be referred to as an accessory. In addition, the game board 6 is provided with various kinds of winnings. Hereinafter, the winning combination means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  An effect display device 9 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 20. The effect display device 9 variably displays (variable display) the effect symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  Above the special symbol display 8, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 turns on the normal symbol (in this example, green and red alternately). The variable display of the six LEDs) is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately changing the six LEDs arranged in the vertical direction between a green-lit state and a red-lit state. For example, at the end of the variable display, the six LEDs are displayed. If it stops in a state of lighting in green, it will be a hit. In the case of winning, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is open for a predetermined time. In the upper left of the normal symbol display 10 (lower right of the effect display device 9), there is provided a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 32. Yes. Each time the gate 32 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, there is provided a big winning opening through which the opening / closing plate 16 is opened by the solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 16 is means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In addition, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 33 is provided below the gate 32, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 38 is provided at the upper left of the big winning opening, and a winning is provided at the upper left of the winning opening 38. A mouth (ordinary winning mouth) 39 is provided. The game balls won in the game ball winning openings 33, 38, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a. The winning openings 33, 38 and 39 constitute a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening. When a game ball wins a winning area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as a prize (prize ball).

  Further, on the game area 7, the big winning opening and the winning opening 33 that are opened and closed by the gate 32 and the opening / closing plate 16 are formed as an integrated member 34. The winning opening 33 is located directly below the gate 32, and only game balls that have passed through the gate 32 can win the winning opening 33. Specifically, on the game area 7, arc-shaped members 30 projecting arcuately on the left and right sides of the gate 32 are provided on the left and right sides of the gate 32. It is in a state covered with the member 30. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to win the winning opening 33 only when the game ball passes through the gate 32, and the gaming ball enters the winning opening 33 from the other direction by being blocked by the arcuate member 30. There will be no winnings. In order to make it possible for only the game balls that have passed through the gate 32 to enter the winning opening 33, for example, instead of the arcuate member 30, the upper portion of the winning opening 33 is covered (the gaming ball can pass through). A plurality of nails may be arranged so that there is no gap.

  A projecting portion 33b projecting to the front side is provided at the lower part of the winning opening 33 (in this embodiment, the projecting portion 33b projects in a triangular shape on the front side when the gaming machine is viewed from the upper surface side). ing. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 first hits the projecting portion 33b, and wins the winning opening 33 when it successfully jumps backward. In addition, although it has passed through the gate 32, when it hits the protruding portion 33b and jumps leftward or rightward, it may not win well at the winning opening 33. Further, a nail hole 32b in which a nail can be arranged is provided between the gate 32 and the winning opening 33, and a nail is arranged in the nail hole 32b or an angle of the arranged nail is adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to change the probability that a game ball that wants to pass through the gate 32 wins the winning opening 33.

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and there is an out port 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize at the bottom.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 7. When the hit ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 is not the upper limit, the number of starting winning memories is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be lit in the normal symbol start memory display 41 is increased by one. When the stop symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined display result (win symbol), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a predetermined number of times and the hit ball is started. You can enter the winning entrance. When the hit ball launched from the hit ball launching device enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start port switch 60, the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 8 as long as the variable symbol display can be started. start. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 18a is increased by one.

  The variable display of special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 8 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, “7”), the first big hit gaming state (hit that starts without going through the starting operation state) of the big hit gaming state Transition to gaming state. Further, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a small hit symbol (predetermined display result: concretely, for example, “1”, “3”, “5”), the state shifts to the start operation state. In the start operation state, when a game ball wins in a specific area provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the state shifts to a second big hit game state (a big hit game state started after passing through the start operation state).

  Next, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 as viewed from the upper right side. As shown in FIG. 2, two open doors, a first open door 76 </ b> A and a second open door 76 </ b> B, are provided above the variable winning ball apparatus (the accessory) 20. In addition, two advance entrances, a first entrance 71 and a second entrance 72 (not shown in FIG. 2) through which game balls enter, are provided above the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In this embodiment, when the first opening door 76A is in a closed state, the first opening 71 is covered by the first opening door 76A, and the game ball cannot enter the first opening 71. It is. Further, when the second open door 76B is in the closed state, the second open door 72B covers the second entrance 72, and the game ball cannot enter the second entrance 72. Further, in this embodiment, when the first opening door 76A is opened, the first entrance 71 is opened and the game ball can enter the first entrance 71. Further, when the second opening door 76B is opened, the second entrance 72 is opened, and the game ball can enter the second entrance 72.

  The first open door 76A and the second open door 76B do not completely cover the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 in the closed state, but partially cover them. It may be. By doing so, when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the closed state, the game is compared with when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the open state. The sphere may be made difficult to enter the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72, respectively. Further, when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the open state, the game ball enters the first approach compared to when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the closed state. You may make it easy to approach the opening 71 and the 2nd entrance 72, respectively.

  In this embodiment, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are integrally formed as one component. Therefore, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are controlled to be in an open state at the same timing in conjunction with each other, and are controlled to be in a closed state at the same timing.

  In the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a decorative member 78 is provided below the open doors 76A and 76B. In the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a movable member 77 (not shown in FIG. 2) that is movable in conjunction with the decoration member 78 is provided on the back side of the decoration member 78. As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the decoration member 78 is formed in a shape imitating a sword, and is decorated with a color or the like corresponding to the sword. In addition, the decoration member 78 is disposed on the front side of the area where the game ball passes in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 so as not to affect the behavior of the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Has been placed. The movable member 77 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 78 and is formed using a transparent or substantially transparent synthetic resin. When viewed from the front of the gaming machine (that is, viewed from the player), the movable member 77 is decorated. It is covered with the member 78 and cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to visually recognize).

  A rotating body 86 that can be driven to rotate is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The rotating body 86 is provided with an opening 66 for guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening (V winning opening) on the upper surface, and the gaming ball dropped on the rotating body 86 is provided on the upper surface of the rotating body 86. It is configured to be able to win a specific winning opening by entering the. The rotating body 86 is also provided with an opening 66b that guides the game ball to the specific winning opening on the side surface, and is configured to be able to win the specific winning opening even when the game ball enters the opening 66b. Hereinafter, the opening 66 leading to the specific winning opening is referred to as a specific opening, and the side opening 66b leading to the specific winning opening is also referred to as a specific side opening.

  The opening / closing operations of the open doors 76A and 76B and the movable operations of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 will be described. FIG. 3 is a front view of the structural parts of the opening / closing mechanism portions of the open doors 76A and 76B of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the movable mechanism portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the structural parts of the open / close mechanism portions of the open doors 76A and 76B of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the movable mechanism portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 as viewed obliquely from the upper right.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the first open door 76 </ b> A and the second open door 76 </ b> B are each formed in a substantially plate shape. Further, the open doors 76A and 76B are integrally formed via a connecting portion 76C. Specifically, the open doors 76A and 76B are integrally formed by molding in advance using a synthetic resin material or the like. The open doors 76A and 76B may be integrally formed by fabricating and assembling the open doors 76A and 76B and the connecting portion 76C as separate parts. An opening solenoid 75 for opening and closing the opening doors 76A and 76B is disposed on the back side of the opening doors 76A and 76B. The open doors 76A and 76B are controlled to be in an open state in conjunction with the open solenoid 75 being driven. The open doors 76A and 76B are controlled to be in a closed state in conjunction with the drive of the open solenoid 75 being stopped. In the example shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the open doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are shown in a closed state. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the open doors 76A and 76B are in the closed state, the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72 are closed by the open doors 76A and 76B. The game ball cannot enter the entrance 71 and the second entrance 72.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the opening and closing mechanism and the movable mechanism when the open doors 76A and 76B are opened. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the opening and closing mechanism and the movable mechanism when the open doors 76A and 76B are opened, as viewed from diagonally upward to the right. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, when the opening solenoid 75 is driven, the opening doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are driven to rotate counterclockwise about the lower side of the opening doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B (rotating shaft). In conjunction with this, it is opened. In this embodiment, drive components (not shown in FIGS. 5 and 6) are connected to the rotation shafts of the open doors 76A and 76B. When the opening solenoid 75 is driven by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), the driving component is driven by the opening solenoid 75, and the opening doors 76A and 76B are rotated counterclockwise about the rotation axis. Are rotated, the open doors 76A and 76B are interlocked to be in an open state. In this embodiment, it is expressed that the open doors 76A and 76B are rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Specifically, the open doors 76A and 76B are viewed from the front direction of the gaming machine (that is, from the player who is playing the game). (See) Rotating drive clockwise or counterclockwise. Further, when the opening doors 76A and 76B are opened, a path of game balls to the first advancement inlet 71 and the second advancement entrance 72 is formed, and the first advancement entrance 71 and the second advancement entrance 72 are formed. The game ball is ready to enter. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, at least the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B that are integrally formed have planar surface portions 76a and 76b that are located on the upper surface side in the open state, Each of the surface portions 76a and 76b is formed to have a width that allows at least one game ball to pass through. Each of the surface portions 76a and 76b faces upward in the open state and is positioned below the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B to guide the game ball to the first and second entrances 71 and 72. Is possible.

  The second opening door 76B is smaller than the first opening door 76A. Each of the open doors 76A and 76B serves as a tray for guiding the game balls to the respective entrances 71 and 72 in the open state, but the second open door 76B is smaller than the first open door 76A. Therefore, the second entrance 72 is smaller in size than the first entrance 71 and is less likely to enter than the first entrance 71.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the open doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are controlled to protrude obliquely upward in the open state. Such control makes it easy for the game balls that have fallen to the surfaces of the open doors 76A and 76B in the open state to be guided to the respective entrances 71 and 72 through the slopes of the open and close doors 76A and 76B.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, two bolt-shaped members 77 </ b> A and 78 </ b> A each having a spiral surface are formed on the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Among these, the bolt-shaped member 77 </ b> A is fitted with a nut-shaped member 77 </ b> C whose inner surface is spirally formed with a groove, and the nut-shaped member 77 </ b> C is connected to the movable member 77. The bolt-shaped member 78A is fitted with a nut-shaped member 78C whose inner surface is spirally formed with a groove, and the nut-shaped member 78C is connected to the decorative member 78. The nut-like members 77C and 78C have spiral grooves formed on their inner surfaces so as to engage with the grooves formed on the bolt-shaped seats 77A and 78A, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the nut-shaped member 77C is located on the back side of the nut-shaped member 78C.

  A movable member drive motor 77B for moving the movable member 77 and a decorative member drive motor 78B for moving the decorative member 78 are disposed below the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A. In this embodiment, the bolt-shaped member 77A is rotationally driven by driving the movable member drive motor 77B. Further, the nut-like member 77C slides between the groove formed on the surface of the bolt-like member 77A and the groove formed on the inner surface of the nut-like member 77C in accordance with the rotational drive of the bolt-like member 77A. It moves upward or downward along the 77-shaped member. Then, the movable member 77 connected to the nut-shaped member 77C moves according to the movement of the nut-shaped member 77C. In this embodiment, the bolt-shaped member 78A is rotationally driven by driving the decorative member drive motor 78B. Further, the nut-shaped member 78C slides between the groove formed on the surface of the bolt-shaped member 78A and the groove formed on the inner surface of the nut-shaped member 78C in accordance with the rotational drive of the bolt-shaped member 77A. It moves up or down along the shaped member 78A. Then, the decorative member 78 connected to the nut-shaped member 78C moves according to the movement of the nut-shaped member 78C.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the nut-like members 77C and 78C are in the uppermost position. In this state, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are in a horizontal state in the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  FIG. 7 is a front view of the opening / closing mechanism portion and the movable mechanism portion when the nut-like members 77C and 78C are moved downward most as viewed from the front. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the opening and closing mechanism and the movable mechanism when the nut-like members 77C and 78C move downward, as viewed from the upper right. In this embodiment, the nut-shaped member 77C is connected to the left end portion of the movable member 77. The nut-shaped member 78C is connected to the left end portion (sword tip portion) of the decorative member 78. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, when the nut-like members 77C and 78C move downward, the left end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are lowered downward according to the movement of the nut-like member 77C. 77 and the decorative member 78 are inclined obliquely downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are movable and tilted obliquely downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion on the front side of the effect display device 9. The display area of the effect display device 9 is overlapped.

  A rail member is provided at the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78, and the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 can move slightly in the left-right direction. That is, as the left end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are lowered downward, the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are also pulled leftward. The right end part absorbs it by moving to the left.

  The decoration member 78 is equipped with a sword drive motor 79 for opening and closing the decoration member 78 itself. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sword drive motor 79 is driven when the decorative member 78 is moved and inclined obliquely downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion. Thus, the decorative member 78 is opened (in this example, the sword is opened in two in the longitudinal direction). In this embodiment, when the decorative member 78 is in the closed state, the movable member 77 is covered with the decorative member 78 and cannot be seen when viewed from the front, but as shown in FIGS. In addition, when the decorative member 78 is in an open state, the movable member 77 positioned on the back side of the decorative member 78 can be viewed from the front. Further, since the movable member 77 is formed using a transparent or substantially transparent synthetic resin material and forms a part of the path of the game ball as will be described later, the decorative member 78 is opened. As a result, the game ball passing through the movable member 77 can be visually recognized.

  The movable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided with position sensors 91a and 91b for detecting the positions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78. In this embodiment, the upper position sensor 91a is disposed above the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A, the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are moved upward, and the nut-shaped members 77C and 78C are positioned at the uppermost position. Then, it is detected by the upper position sensor 91a and a detection signal is output. In this embodiment, the lower position sensor 91b is disposed below the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A, the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are moved downward, and the nut-shaped members 77C and 78C are positioned at the lowermost position. In this state, the lower position sensor 91b detects and outputs a detection signal.

  Next, the path of the game ball in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described. In this embodiment, two paths for game balls are provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Specifically, when the first open door 76A is opened, the first path through which the game ball entered from the first entrance 71 is allowed to enter, and the second open door 76B is opened. A second path through which the game ball that has entered from the second entrance 72 is allowed to enter. In this embodiment, as described above, the first entrance 71 is easier to enter than the second entrance 72, but by passing through the first route, compared to the case via the second route. As a result, it is difficult to reach the specific winning opening or the discharging opening in a short time and to win the specific winning opening. In addition, as described above, the second entrance 72 is less likely to enter than the first entrance 71, but the specific award is obtained by passing through the second route as compared to the case through the first route. It takes a long time to reach the mouth or the outlet, and it is easy to win a specific prize opening.

  First, a description will be given of a first path through which a game ball that has entered from the first entrance 71 passes when the first opening door 76A is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a first path provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. A game ball that has entered from the first entrance 71 is detected by a first prize winning switch 71 a provided in the vicinity of the first entrance 71 and guided to the left in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Then, it is guided to the lower left in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 through the inside of the path member 92 provided on the left side in the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a first storage member 93 a that is movable back and forth with respect to the front direction is provided on the lower left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the game ball guided through the path member 92. The 1st storage part which stores temporarily is formed. Further, on the lower left side of the variable winning ball device 20, there is provided a discharge port 83 for entering the first entrance 71 and discharging the second and subsequent game balls guided from the first path.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode in which the game ball guided from the first route after entering the first entrance 71 is stored. As shown in FIG. 10 (A), the game ball guided through the path member 92 is in a state where the path is blocked by the first storage member 93a and stored. Further, when two or more game balls further enter the first entrance 71 and are guided through the path member 92, they are already stored in the first storage section as shown in FIG. 10B. It is repelled by the game ball and discharged from the discharge port 83.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an aspect in which the storage state of the game balls stored in the first storage unit is released. A first reservoir solenoid 90a (not shown in FIG. 11) for driving the first reservoir member 93a is disposed on the lower left rear surface of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the first reservoir solenoid 90a By driving, the 1st storage member 93a moves to a back direction. Then, the storage state of the game balls stored in the first storage unit is released and guided downward in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, there is provided an inclined portion 73 that is inclined obliquely downward toward the rotating body 86. The game ball is guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 and the inclined portion 73 is played through the game. The ball rolls and then enters the openings 66b and 84 of the rotating body 86 (the openings led to the specific winning opening or the opening to be removed). Although not shown in FIG. 11, a synthetic resin transparent plate extending upward is provided on the front side (stage end) of the inclined portion 73, and a game ball guided to the front side is a stage. It is configured not to fall from the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the rotating body 86 is provided with a specific side surface opening 66 b in a side surface portion adjacent to the specific opening 66 provided on the upper surface. When the game ball is led to the front side of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the side surface on which the specific side surface opening 66b of the rotating body 86 is provided faces the front side, the gaming ball is stored in the specific side surface opening 66b. And enter the specific prize opening. Specifically, the specific winning opening is provided so as to be positioned below the rotating body 86, and the game ball that has entered the specific side surface opening 66 b is further added to the specific winning opening provided below the rotating body 86. enter in. In addition, a specific area switch 66a is provided at the specific winning opening, and a game ball won at the specific winning opening is detected by the specific area switch 66a. Note that the game ball that has won the specific winning opening and is detected by the specific area switch 66a is further detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a.

  The rotating body 86 is provided with a plurality of side surface openings 84 together with the specific side surface opening 66b. If the game ball is not guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the side surface on which the specific side opening 66b of the rotating body 86 is provided faces the front side, the gaming ball is opened to the specific side opening. It cannot enter 66b, and enters the side opening 84 other than the specific side opening 66b. In this case, the game ball cannot win a specific winning opening provided below the rotator 86 and is discharged from an outlet provided on the side of the rotator 86. In addition, the accessory discharge switch 85a is provided in the discharge port, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. In addition, the game balls that have entered the first entrance 71 after the second and discharged from the discharge port 83 are also detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a.

  In this embodiment, the total size of the openings of all the side openings 86 provided on the side surface of the rotating body 86 is 9 with respect to the size 1 of the opening of the specific side opening 66b. is there. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 and led to the first path enters the specific side opening 66b with a probability of 1/10 and wins the specific winning opening, and is selected by the specific area switch 66a. Detected. In other words, it is a big hit with a probability of 1/10.

  Next, a description will be given of a second route through which a game ball that has entered from the second entrance 72 passes when the second opening door 76B is opened. FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are explanatory diagrams showing the second path provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. A game ball that has entered from the second entrance 71 is detected by a second prize winning switch 72a provided in the vicinity of the second entrance 72, and passes through the inside of the path member 94 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. It is guided to the upper right in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 through. A second storage member 93b that is movable to the left and right is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning ball device 20, and a second storage unit that temporarily stores the game ball guided through the path member 94 is formed. Yes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12, the game ball that has entered from the second entrance 72 and led through the path member 94 is temporarily stored in the second storage section. In the following description, the first prize winning switch 71a and the second prize winning switch 72a may be collectively referred to as an “act winning prize switch”.

  A second reservoir solenoid 90b for driving the second reservoir member 93b is disposed on the upper right rear surface of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. When a predetermined time has elapsed with the game ball once stored in the second storage part, the second storage member 93b is moved leftward by driving the second storage part solenoid 90b as shown in FIG. The second storage part is opened. Then, the game ball once stored in the second storage unit is guided downward by the opening of the second storage unit, and is guided into the movable member 77. Further, by driving the movable member drive motor 77B and the decorative member movable motor 78B, the variable member 77 and the decorative member 78 move in conjunction with each other, and the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left. It becomes a state. Further, by driving the sword drive motor 79, the decorative member 78 is opened in two in the longitudinal direction.

  When the movable member 77 is inclined, the game ball guided from the second reservoir passes through the movable member 77 and is guided to the path member 95 provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20. It is burned. In this case, as shown in FIG. 13, the decoration member 78 is controlled to be opened in two in the longitudinal direction, so that the game ball passing through the movable member 77 can be viewed from the front. The path member 95 provided below in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is slightly inclined obliquely downward from the left to the right, and the game ball guided to the path member 95 passes through the path member 95. It rolls to the right and falls onto the upper surface of the rotating body 86.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the game ball after dropping onto the upper surface of the rotating body 86. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the rotator 86 is driven to rotate at a constant speed in the clockwise direction after the open doors 76A and 76B of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 are opened. Start. The rotating body 86 may be driven to rotate counterclockwise at a constant speed, or the rotating direction may be reversed at a predetermined timing. A specific opening 66 is provided in a region of the outer peripheral portion on the upper surface of the rotating body 86. Further, a specific side surface opening 66 b and a plurality of side surface openings 84 are provided on the side surface of the rotating body 86. In addition, a plurality of groove-shaped portions 96 for guiding game balls are formed on the upper surface of the rotating body 86, and the game balls dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 are identified through any of the groove-shaped portions 96. It is guided to the opening 66 or the side opening 84.

  FIG. 14B shows the movement of the game ball when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side with respect to the player. The rotating body 86 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward from the back direction to the front direction with respect to the player, and the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 is grooved according to the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating body 86. It rolls in the front side direction through the shape portion 96. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, since the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 rolls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 in the front direction and enters the specific opening 66. Then, a prize is awarded to a specific prize opening 66A provided below the rotator 86, and as shown in FIG. 14B, it is detected by a specific area switch 66a provided in the special prize slot 66A and discharges an accessory. It is detected by the switch 85a. Note that a wall portion 66c is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the upper surface of the rotating body 86 where the specific opening 66 is provided, and the game ball that faces the specific opening 66 on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 jumps over the specific opening 66. Thus, it does not jump out from the rotating body 86 to the front side.

  14C and 14D show the movement of the game ball when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the specific opening 66 is positioned on the side facing the front side with respect to the player. ing. A wall portion 66d is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the region facing the region where the specific opening 66 is provided on the upper surface of the rotating body 86, and the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 is It rolls in the direction of the wall part 66d through the groove shape part 96 according to inclination. Then, as shown in FIG. 14C, the game ball is blocked from advancing by the wall portion 66d and is temporarily stored on the upper surface of the rotating body 86. Next, when the rotating body 86 rotates clockwise and the specific opening 66 is located on the front side with respect to the player, as shown in FIG. The sphere rolls in the front side direction through the groove-shaped portion 96 according to the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating body 86. In the example shown in FIG. 14D, since the specific opening 66 is located on the front side, the game ball once stored near the wall portion 66d rolls the upper surface of the rotating body 86 in the front direction and the specific opening 66. Enter. And it wins in the specific winning opening 66A provided under the rotary body 86, and it detects with the special area switch 66a, and also detects with the accessory discharge switch 85a. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 and has passed through the second path falls into the rotating body 86 at the timing when the specific opening 66 is located on the front side, and when the specific opening 66 is At two timings, when it falls to the rotating body 86 at the timing facing the front side, it is detected by the specific area switch 66a and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a at the specific winning opening 66A. May be.

  When the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at a timing other than the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side and the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the side facing the front side, the upper surface of the rotating body 86 The game ball that has fallen to the side passes through the groove-shaped portion 96 according to the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating body 86 and falls to the side surface side of the rotating body 86.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, groove-shaped portions 96 are formed in six directions on the upper surface of the rotating body 86, as shown in FIGS. 14 (B), (C), and (D). Thus, when guided to the two-way groove shape portion 96 of the six-direction groove shape portions 96, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the specific winning opening 66A and be detected by the specific region switch 66a. . Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 and led to the second route enters the specific opening 66 with a one-third probability and wins the specific winning opening 66A, and is detected by the specific area switch 66a. And is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. That is, it is a big hit with a probability of one third.

  FIG. 15 shows a game ball when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at a timing other than the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side and the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the side facing the front side. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, the game ball that has dropped onto the upper surface of the rotating body 86 passes through the groove-shaped portion 96 and falls to the side surface side of the rotating body 86 according to the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating body 86. In this case, if the game ball enters the side opening 84 as it is after falling to the side surface of the rotator 86, the game ball cannot enter the specific winning opening 66A. It is discharged from the discharge port provided on the side of (i.e., disengaged). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, each side surface opening 84 provided on the side surface side of the rotating body 86 has a shape that is recessed inward so that a game ball flowing down to the side surface side can be fitted. However, the depth of the hollow portion is formed so as not to reach the specific winning opening 66 </ b> A provided below the rotating body 86. Therefore, the game ball fitted in the side opening 84 is guided to the left side of the rotating body 86 according to the rotational drive of the rotating body 86 without winning the specific winning opening 66A. A discharge port connection port 83a connected to the discharge port 83 is provided on the left side of the rotating body, and the game ball guided to the left side of the rotation body 86 is guided to the discharge port 83 from the discharge port connection port 83a. , And detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a.

  On the other hand, even if it falls to the side surface side of the rotating body 86, the game ball may stay on the inclined portion 73 without entering the side surface side opening 84 due to bouncing at the momentum of falling. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the specific side surface opening 66b is next positioned on the front side according to the rotation of the rotating body 86, the game ball staying on the inclined portion 73 is specified. The player enters the side opening 66b and enters the specific winning port 66A, and is detected by the specific area switch 66a and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 and passed through the second path cannot enter the specific opening 66 on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 and falls to the side surface side, the specific side surface is further reduced. There is a possibility of entering the side opening 66b and winning the specific winning opening 66A. If the opening located on the front side next to the rotation of the rotating body 86 is the side opening 84 other than the specific side opening 66b, even if the gaming ball stays on the inclined portion 73, the gaming ball The specific winning opening 66A cannot be won, and is discharged from the discharge port 83 through the discharge port connection port 83a provided on the left side of the rotating body 86 and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a ( In other words, it will be off).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, an accessory discharge switch 85 a for detecting a game ball won in the specific winning slot 66 A and a role for detecting a game ball discharged from the outlet 83. Although the case where the object discharge switch 85a is provided separately has been shown, the detection may be performed using only one accessory discharge switch 85a. For example, a path through which the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 66A and a path through which the game ball has entered the discharge port 83 are merged on the back side of the game board 6, and one bonus discharge switch is provided for the path after the merge. 85a may be provided to detect both the game ball that has won the specific winning port 66A and the game ball that has entered the discharge port 83.

  A sensor for position detection is provided in the vicinity of the rotating body 86. The sensor includes, for example, a light emitting element such as a light emitting diode and a light receiving element such as a photodiode or a phototransistor installed so as to sandwich the rotating body 86. The sensor is provided below the rotating body 86 and rotates together with the rotating body 86. A slit (hole) is provided in the disk member. The slit is formed at a predetermined position in the inner region of the rotating body 86. Specifically, when the disk member rotates together with the rotating body 86 and the area including the slit comes to a position corresponding to the sensor installation position, the light is emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element side. Yes. Hereinafter, the light receiving element is referred to as a rotating body position sensor 87a. In this embodiment, the rotating body position sensor 87a is provided at a position for detecting the slit at the timing when the side of the rotating body 86 where the specific opening 66 and the specific side surface opening 66b are provided reaches the front side. ing. Therefore, the rotary body position sensor 87a outputs an ON signal at the timing when the side where the specific opening 66 and the specific side surface opening 66b of the rotary body 86 are provided reaches the front side.

  Next, the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 will be described. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 as viewed from the upper right. FIG. 17 is a view of the normal variable winning ball device 61 as seen from the front, top, bottom and side surfaces. Among these, FIG. 17A is a view of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 as viewed from above. FIG. 17B is a view of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 as viewed from the front. FIG. 17C is a view of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 as viewed from the side. FIG. 17D is a view of the normal variable winning ball device 61 as viewed from the bottom.

  The operation of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 will be described. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 cut along the AA plane shown in FIG. 16 in the longitudinal direction. Among these, FIG. 18 (A) is a diagram showing a case where the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in a closed state. FIG. 18B is a diagram showing a case where the normal variable winning ball device 61 is in an open state. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the cross section shown in FIG. 18 as viewed from the upper right. Among these, FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a case where the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in a closed state. FIG. 19B is a diagram illustrating a case where the normal variable winning ball device 61 is in an open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, a movable portion 63, which is a movable plate-like member, is provided below the entrance 67 through which a game ball enters. Further, a movable part solenoid 62 for moving the movable part 63 is disposed above the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61. In addition, the movable portion 63 and the movable portion solenoid 62 are connected by a rod-like connecting member 64. That is, one end portion 64 a of the connecting member 64 is connected to the movable portion 63, and the other end portion 64 c of the connecting member 64 is connected to the movable portion solenoid 62. The connecting member 64 is provided with a fixed portion 64b that is rotatably fixed between end portions 64a and 64c connected to the movable portion 63 and the movable portion solenoid 62, respectively. Therefore, the connecting member 64 performs a rotating motion around the fixed portion 64 b as the movable portion solenoid 62 is driven.

  When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the closed state, the movable portion 63 is housed in the entrance 67 as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) and 19 (A). The entrance 67 has an opening surface 67a that is large enough to allow one game ball to pass through. However, when the movable portion 63 is housed in the entrance 67, the board 67 The size of the opening of the normally variable winning ball device 61 (the size of A shown in FIG. 18A) is reduced by the thickness of the movable portion 63 that is a member, and the opening A of the normal variable winning ball device 61 is reduced. Becomes smaller than the size of one game ball. Therefore, in the closed state in which the movable portion 63 is housed in the entrance 67, the game ball cannot enter the start winning opening constituted by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61.

  When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be in the open state, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 19B, the movable member solenoid 62 is driven to connect the connecting member 64 to the fixed portion. The advancing operation is performed so that the movable portion 63 protrudes toward the game area side by rotating around the axis 64b. As shown in FIG. 19B, the movable portion 63 has a size that reaches the position of the opening surface 67a of the entrance 67 while the movable portion 63 protrudes from the back side in the entrance 67 to the game area side. An opening 63a is provided. Therefore, when the movable portion 63 moves forward and protrudes to the game area side, the opening portion 67a of the movable portion 63 increases the size of the opening surface 67a of the entrance 67, and the game ball passes through the opening surface 67a. It becomes possible. In addition, on the front side of the opening 63a of the movable portion 63, an inclined portion 63b that is inclined obliquely downward from the front side to the back side of the movable portion 63 is provided. In this case, the opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is a portion (B shown in FIG. 18B) from the most front end of the inclined portion 63b provided in the movable portion 63 to the upper end of the opening 63a. However, the size of the opening B of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is larger than the size of the opening A in the closed state shown in FIG. 18A, and is large enough to allow one game ball to pass. Therefore, in the open state in which the movable portion 63 moves forward and protrudes toward the game area side, the game ball can enter a start winning opening constituted by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61. Note that the game ball that has reached the opening B of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is guided into the entrance 67 by the inclined portion 63 b provided in the movable portion 63. In addition, an inclined portion 67b that is inclined obliquely downward toward the back side is also provided above the entrance 67, and the game ball that has reached the opening surface 67a of the entrance 67 is further above the entrance 67. It is guided into the entrance 67 by the inclined portion 67b. Then, the game ball that has entered the entrance 67 is detected by the start port switch 60.

  When the normal variable winning ball device 61 is controlled to be closed again, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 19A, the driving of the movable portion solenoid 62 is stopped, and the connecting member 64 is moved. It rotates in the opposite direction to the case where it is controlled in the open state with the fixed portion 64b as an axis. For this reason, the movable portion 63 performs a retreat operation inside the entrance 67, and the movable portion 63 returns to a state where it is stored in the entrance 67.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be in the open state, an advance operation that projects obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction is performed. A movable part 63 is arranged. With this configuration, in this embodiment, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61, a ball clogging or a game ball is sandwiched between the movable portion 63 and the front glass (or a decorative portion 65 described later). It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding smoothly.

  For example, as in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the movable portion 63 performs an advance operation that protrudes perpendicularly to the game area, the game ball is accidentally caused at the timing when the movable portion 63 performs the protrusion operation. When passing in front of the movable part 63, the game ball may be sandwiched between the movable part 63 and the front glass, and the movable part 63 may not be completely projected. In addition, the impact when the game ball is caught may lead to a failure of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 configured using the movable portion 63. In this embodiment, the advancing operation is performed so that the movable portion 63 protrudes obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction, so that the game ball accidentally passes in front of the movable portion 63 at the timing when the movable portion 63 performs the protruding operation. Even if it happens, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the movable portion 63 and the front glass.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 is provided with a decoration portion 65 that is a plate-like member having a predetermined decoration on the front side. . Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the passage route of the game ball to the normal variable winning ball device 61 is restricted so that the game ball enters from above the normal variable winning ball device 61 and flows downward. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the amount of game balls that can pass through the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 to the minimum necessary, and to prevent a situation in which the game balls enter the entrance 67 of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 more than necessary. be able to. Specifically, in a gaming machine, generally, a space through which one or more game balls can pass is provided between the game area on the game board 6 and the front glass, so that the movable portion 63 is located inside the game area. Even when the player is moving backward, the game ball may enter the entrance area 67 from the front side with respect to the game area. By providing the decoration portion 65 in the forward direction of the entrance 67, the game balls entering from the forward direction to such a game area are eliminated, and more than necessary game balls are placed in the entrance 67 of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61. A situation of entering can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the front side of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is covered with the decoration portion 65, the state in which the movable portion 63 moves forward or backward is shown. It can be difficult to recognize from the player. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a long time (for example, 5.0 seconds) and when it is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). There are two types of open states, and it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which open state the decoration unit 65 is, and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a short time. However, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being reduced.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 20, when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the detection signal of the gate switch 32a is turned on, a lottery is executed by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the lottery result is a win or a miss. Then, normal symbol variation (variable display) is started. In addition, the first decorative symbol and the effect symbol change (variable display) are started in synchronization with the normal symbol change (variable display). When the variation of the normal symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol is finished, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be in the open state when the winning symbol is determined. Then, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the detection signal of the start opening switch 60 is turned on, the lottery is executed by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the lottery result is either a big hit or a small hit, and there is no loss.

  Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol is started. In addition, the variation of the second decorative symbol (variable display) is started in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol (variable display), and an effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed on the effect display device 9. When the variation of the special symbol and the second decorative symbol is finished, if the big hit is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state). In this big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state), the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 16 is controlled to open and close, for example, 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening permissible time is 29 seconds). The effect executed in the effect display device 9 in response to the change (variable display) of the special symbol is given priority over the change (variable display) of the effect symbol synchronized with the change (variable display) of the normal symbol. Is called. Therefore, for example, when an effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed in the effect display device 9, even if the variation of the normal symbol is started, the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation display of the normal symbol is started. Without stating, the production corresponding to the change of the special symbol is continued.

  When the small hit is determined, the game control means controls the accessory 20 to the open state and starts the starting operation. In the starting operation state, the accessory 20 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. In the start-up operation state, a V-winning occurs when the game ball wins the winning combination 20, and when the game ball wins the specific winning slot 66A and is detected by the specific area switch 66a. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). In this big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state), the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 16 is controlled to open and close, for example, 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds). If no V prize is generated, the game does not enter the second big hit gaming state. In other words, it becomes out of place.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 21 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers. The random number circuit 503 may be provided outside the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 instead of being built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. In this embodiment, the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  In addition, the gate switch 32a, the start opening switch 60, the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a, the specific area switch 66a, the accessory discharging switch 85a, the upper position sensor 91a, the lower position sensor 91b, the rotation An input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the body position sensor 87a, the prize opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, a movable part solenoid 62 for opening and closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 16, a movable member drive motor 77B for moving the movable member 77, and a rotating body 86 are driven to rotate. Rotational drive motor 87, opening solenoid 75 that opens and closes the open doors 76A and 76B, a first reservoir solenoid 90a that moves the first reservoir member 93a, and a second reservoir solenoid that moves the second reservoir member 93b. An output circuit 59 for driving 90b according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 177. The display control of the effect display device 9, the lighting control of the lamp, and the control of the speaker 27 are performed.

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 177, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 177. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 177 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal direction does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  Further, the signal direction regulation that allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass through the relay board 177 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). A unidirectional circuit 177A as a means is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 22 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal directed from the relay board 177 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 177 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 177 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp (not shown) provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 101, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 in such a way that a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side. Communication).

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols and background symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving a decoration member drive motor 78B for moving the decoration member 78 and a sword drive motor 79 for opening / closing the decoration member 78 via the output port 105.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address. The CPU 56 also executes processing for initializing the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. The random number circuit 503 generates a random number using a predetermined clock signal. As an example, the random number circuit 503 is set to output any numerical value of 0 to 598 to the CPU 56 when the numerical value is read from the CPU 56.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but it is set to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S10 to S12, for example, an initial value (for example, 0) is set to a flag for performing processing selectively according to the control state such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol, and the display random number update process is to update the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. It is processing. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (normal random number generation counter for determining per symbol). For determining the initial value of the random number for determining the initial value of the counter and the counter value for generating the random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (random number generation counter for determining the special symbol variation pattern) It is a random number. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game machine control process), the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol is one round (normal When the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the random values for determination per symbol is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S36 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, via the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the start opening switch 60, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, the specific area switch 66a, the winning combination discharging switch 85a, and the winning opening switch 33a. , 38a, 39a, the count switch 23, the upper position sensor 91a, the lower position sensor 91b, and the detection signal of the rotating body position sensor 87a are input and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 and S35.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying the abnormality when various abnormalities relating to the gaming machine are detected, for example, when it is detected that the game ball has won the big prize opening at a time other than the regular time (step) S23: Abnormality notification processing).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determines whether or not there is a reach during normal symbol variation (for reach determination)
(2) Random 2: Determine the variation pattern type of the normal symbol (for determining the normal symbol variation pattern type)
(3) Random 3: Normal pattern fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined (for normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5: Determine the normal symbol hit type (for normal symbol type judgment)
(6) Random 6: Random 4 initial value is determined (for determining random 4 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (for determining the special symbol variation pattern)
(8) Random 8: Determine initial value of random 7 (for determining random 7 initial value)

  Note that a random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is used as a big hit determination random number for determining whether to win a big hit or a small hit. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number may be referred to as a random R. The random numbers (1) to (8) may be referred to as software random numbers.

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 24, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a random number for determining reach, (2) a random number for determining normal symbol variation pattern type, and (3) a normal symbol. A random number for determining a variation pattern, (4) a random number for determining per ordinary symbol, (5) a random number for determining a type per ordinary symbol, and (7) a counter for generating a random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern ( 1 addition). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the gaming effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (8) may be used. In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a random number generated by the hardware (random number circuit 503) built in the game control microcomputer 560. The big hit determination random number is used as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated based on the program may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). The special symbol process process corresponds to a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening (large winning port by the accessory 20 and the opening / closing plate 16) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Execute the process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 and the control state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to the display control of the effect display device 9 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the start opening switch 60, the first winning combination winning combination switch 71a, the second winning combination winning combination switch 72a, the winning opening opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a, and the count switch 23. A prize ball process is performed (step S31). Specifically, the winning detection based on any one of the start opening switch 60, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, the winning opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a, and the count switch 23 being turned on. Accordingly, a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 turns on / off the solenoid in the RAM area (port output RAM area) of the output port. The contents relating to off are output to the output port (step S32: solenoid output processing).

  Further, an initial position control process, which is a process for setting the positions of the rotating body 86 and the movable member 77 provided in the accessory 20 to the initial positions, is executed (step S33).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, if the fluctuation speed of the special symbol is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S35). For example, if the fluctuation rate of the normal symbol is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S36), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S35 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit / small hit determination table used for determining whether a special symbol is a big hit or small hit. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the range of numerical values that can be taken by the jackpot determination random number (random R) is 0 to 65535. The total number of determination values is 65536, which is a number that the jackpot determination random number can take. The CPU 56 extracts the count value from the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. Decide to do. It should be noted that since the second big hit game is started when a V win is generated in the small hit game (corresponding to the starting operation state), it is substantially determined that the big hit or the small hit is decided. It is also to decide whether it will be the second big hit. Further, the big hit / small hit determination table as shown in FIG. 26 is stored in the ROM 54 as a table. That is, a table in which each determination value is set corresponding to the type of special symbol is stored in the ROM 54.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a universal symbol determination table used for determination of normal symbols. In this embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for random determination per symbol (random 4) is 0 to 259. The total number of determination values is 260, which is the number that the jackpot determination random number can take.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the number of determination values corresponding to the hit is constant regardless of whether the gaming state is a short-time state (advantageous state) or a normal state (non-advantageous state). is there. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, regardless of whether the gaming state is the advantageous state or the normal state, it is a hit with a probability of one half. In this embodiment, the advantageous state means a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. Further, the normal state (also referred to as normal time) refers to a state that is not a time-short state (non-time-short state). Note that the special symbol variation time may be shortened in a short time state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined per ordinary symbol (also referred to as per ordinary symbol), the type per ordinary symbol is determined as either per long ordinary symbol or per short ordinary symbol. The long regular symbol is a regular symbol in which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is open for a long time (for example, 5.0 seconds) based on the fact that the variation display result of the regular symbol is the regular symbol. . In addition, per short normal figure is based on the fact that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is open for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) based on the fact that the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is per normal figure. It is. In addition, when it is determined per short usual figure, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be open only for a very short time, so that it is rare that the game ball wins the starting prize opening during the short usual figure. Yes, but not without winning.

  FIG. 28 shows a type determination table per base map for determining whether the type per base map is per long base map or per short base map when it is determined to be per base map. It is explanatory drawing. Among these, FIG. 28 (A) is a normal time per type figure determination table used when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 28 (B) is a time determination type classification determination table used when the gaming state is a time reduction state. As shown in FIG. 28 (A), in this embodiment, in the case of the normal state, it is determined to be per long long map with a probability of 3% among the cases determined as per normal map. , It is determined to be per short map with a probability of 97%. Further, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the case of the time-short state, when it is determined that the normal map is hit, it is determined that the long normal map is hit with a probability of 100%.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for determining a special symbol variation pattern (referred to as a special symbol variation pattern). As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, special figure fluctuation patterns # 1 to # 93 are used as special figure fluctuation patterns. In addition, a determination value for a special symbol variation pattern determining random number (random 7) is assigned to each special symbol variation pattern. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the big hit is determined, the special figure variation pattern # 1 for the big hit is used. Further, when it is determined that a small hit, any one of the special figure variation patterns # 2 to # 93 for the small hit is selected and used. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 29 is stored in the ROM 54, for example.

  30 and 31 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern of a normal symbol (referred to as a normal variation pattern). Among these, FIG. 30A is a normal symbol variation pattern table used when the normal symbol variation display result is determined to be lost without reach or short per symbol without reach. FIG. 30B is a normal symbol variation pattern table used when the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is determined to be lost with reach or short per symbol with reach. FIG. 31 is a normal symbol variation pattern table used when the normal symbol variation display result is determined to be per long regular symbol. As shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, a common normal symbol variation pattern table is used when the normal symbol variation display result is determined to be lost and when it is determined to be per short common symbol. It is done. That is, the common pattern variation pattern is shared between the case where the variation display result of the normal symbol is determined to be lost and the case where the normal symbol variation display is determined to be per short common symbol. The normal symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 are stored in the ROM 54, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in this embodiment, the common map change patterns # 1 to # 52 are used as the normal map change patterns. Of these, the common map variation patterns # 1 to # 28 are common map variation patterns for losing or short regular maps. Further, the common map variation patterns # 29 to # 52 are common map variation patterns for long long maps. Further, in this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern table is divided into ordinary symbol variation pattern types # 1 to # 13 indicating the types of ordinary symbol variation patterns.

  The normal fluctuation pattern type # 1 is a normal fluctuation pattern type including the normal fluctuation normal fluctuation pattern # 1 selected in the normal state in the case where it is determined that there is no reach or short per normal figure. Further, the normal variation pattern type # 2 is a general variation pattern type including a normal variation pattern # 2 of a shortened variation that is selected in a normal state when it is determined that there is a loss without reach or a short regular map. . Further, the general variation pattern type # 3 is a general variation pattern type including general variation patterns # 3 to # 6 with various specific effects in the case where it is determined that there is no reach or short per normal diagram. As shown in FIG. 30 (A), the normal variation pattern type # 3 includes a normal variation pattern including a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, and a notice effect as a specific effect. Further, the normal variation pattern type # 4 is a general variation pattern type including a normal variation normal pattern variation # 7 selected in a short-time state when it is determined that there is no reach or short per normal map. . Further, the normal variation pattern type # 5 is a general variation pattern type including a normal variation pattern # 8 of a shortened variation that is selected in a normal state when it is determined that there is no reach or short per normal map. .

  The common map variation pattern type # 6 is a general variation pattern type including normal map variation patterns # 9 to # 13 with normal reach when it is determined that there is a loss with reach or a short regular map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the normal variation pattern type # 6 includes a normal variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, etc. in normal reach. Further, the common map variation pattern type # 7 is a general map variation pattern type including the regular map variation patterns # 14 to # 18 with super reach A when it is determined that there is a loss with reach or a short regular map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the common map variation pattern type # 7 includes a common map variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, and the like in Super Reach A. Further, the common map variation pattern type # 8 is a common map variation pattern type including the regular map variation patterns # 19 to # 23 with the super reach B in the case where it is determined that there is a loss with reach or a short regular map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the common map variation pattern type # 8 includes a common map variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, and the like in Super Reach B. Further, the common map variation pattern type # 9 is a general map variation pattern type including the regular map variation patterns # 24 to # 28 with the super reach C when it is determined that there is a loss with reach or a short regular map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the common map variation pattern type # 9 includes a common map variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, etc. in the super reach C.

  The normal variation pattern type # 10 is a normal variation pattern type including normal variation patterns # 29 to # 34 with normal reach in the case where it is determined to be per long general map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the normal map change pattern type # 10 includes a normal map change pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, a resurrection effect, and the like in normal reach. Further, the general map variation pattern type # 11 is a general map variation pattern type including general map variation patterns # 35 to # 40 with super reach A when it is determined to be per long general map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the common map variation pattern type # 11 includes a common map variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, a resurrection effect, and the like in Super Reach A. Further, the general map variation pattern type # 12 is a general map variation pattern type including the general map variation patterns # 41 to # 46 with the super reach B in the case where it is determined to be per long general map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the common map variation pattern type # 12 includes a common map variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, a resurrection effect, and the like in Super Reach B. Further, the general map variation pattern type # 13 is a general map variation pattern type including the general map variation patterns # 47 to # 52 with the super reach C in the case where it is determined to be per long long map. Note that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the common map variation pattern type # 13 includes a common map variation pattern with a slip effect, a pseudo-ream, a notice effect, a resurrection effect, and the like in Super Reach C.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a general variation pattern type determination table for determining a general variation pattern type. Among these, FIG. 32 (A) is a universal pattern variation pattern type determination table used when it is determined that the long universal map is determined. FIG. 32B is a common pattern variation pattern type determination table used when it is determined that there is a loss with reach or per short common map. FIG. 32C is a universal pattern variation pattern type determination table used when it is determined that there is a loss without reach or a short normal map. As shown in FIG. 32, a determination value for a normal symbol variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is assigned to each normal pattern variation pattern type determination table. 32 is stored in the ROM 54, for example.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach determination table for determining whether or not reach is performed in the variation display of the effect symbol performed in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol when it is determined that the normal figure is lost. It is. As shown in FIG. 33, a determination value for the reach determination random number (random 1) is assigned to the reach determination table. The reach determination table shown in FIG. 33 is stored in the ROM 54, for example.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed.

  When the CPU 56 performs the special symbol process, if the start opening switch (start opening switch 60) for detecting that the game ball has won the start winning opening provided in the game board 6 is turned on, That is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening has occurred (step S321), a start opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301).

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302).

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is specially set. It is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to the symbol stop process (step S303).

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. Moreover, control which transmits the special symbol confirmation designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S307). When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to the pre-release of the accessory (step S304). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol when the special symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Pre-opening process of accessory (step S304): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 560 executes a process for performing the starting operation, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) in accordance with the process of releasing the accessory (step S305). Update to the value (5 in this example).

  Processing during opening of an accessory (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. It is confirmed whether or not the specific area switch 66a is turned on, and whether or not the accessory release time has elapsed. When the specific area switch 66a is turned on, the V winning flag is set. When the bonus release time has elapsed, the bonus is closed. Then, if the number of times of opening of the accessory has not reached the determined number of times of opening, the accessory is brought into an open state in order to perform the starting operation again. When the number of times of opening of the accessory has reached the determined number of times of opening, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the processing after the accessory closing (step S306). Update to

  Post-combination processing (step S306): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S307). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to open the big prize opening (large prize opening by the opening and closing plate 16). More specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the big prize opening is opened. In addition, the execution time of the process for opening the special prize opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (this value corresponding to the process for opening the special prize opening (step S308)). In the example, update to 8). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to the post winning prize closing process (step S309). ).

  Process after closing the big prize opening (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S307). When all the rounds are finished, the internal state is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to the big hit end process (step S310).

  Big hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 177 with eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. Note that the effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 37, commands 8000 (H) to 805C (H) are effect control commands (special symbol variation pattern commands) for designating special symbol variation patterns (special symbol variation patterns # 1 to # 93, respectively). Corresponding).

  Command 8CXX (H) is a special figure display result command for designating a variable symbol display result of special symbols. Of these, the command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (special figure small hit designation command) for designating that the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a small hit. The command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (special figure big hit designation command) for designating that the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (special symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the special symbol variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of a small hit game (starting operation state).

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, for ending the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  Commands B000 (H) to B033 (H) are effect control commands (ordinary pattern change pattern commands) for designating a change pattern of effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of normal symbols. (Corresponding to normal symbol variation patterns # 1 to # 52, respectively). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands B000 (H) to B033 (H), the production display device 9 performs control so that variable display of the production symbols is started.

  The command BCXX (H) is a special figure display result command for designating a variable symbol display result for normal symbols. Of these, the command BC00 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary deviation designation command) that designates that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is lost. The command BC01 (H) is an effect control command (designation command per short common figure) that designates that the variable symbol display result of normal symbols is per short common figure. The command BC02 (H) is an effect control command (designation command for long common symbol) that designates that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is per long regular symbol.

  The command BF00 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable symbol display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the normal symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and derives and displays the display result. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designating command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning to the big winning opening. Command D002 (H) is an effect control command (start winning abnormality designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning to the start winning opening. The command D1XX (H) is an effect control command (abnormality notification designation command) for designating notification of various abnormalities (for example, 12V short-circuit error, magnetic sensor detection, and photosensor error described later) specified by XX. .

  Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (start winning designation command) indicating that a start winning has occurred. Note that the effect control command indicating that the start winning has occurred may be an effect control command indicating the reserved storage number itself.

  The command E400 (H) is an effect control command (a first winning combination winning designation command) indicating that the winning of the winning combination 20 at the first advance entrance 71 has occurred. The command E401 (H) is an effect control command (second prize winning designation command) indicating that the winning of the accessory 20 at the second entrance 72 has occurred. The command E402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning designation command) indicating that a winning at the specific winning opening 66A has occurred.

  The command E5XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) indicating that the time reduction state continues until the special symbol variation display after the big hit ends is completed XX times. Command E600 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction end designation command) indicating that the time reduction state has ended.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 37, the display state of the light emitter such as a lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S322. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S81). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (step S82). Further, the CPU 56 reads a count value from a counter for generating a random number and extracts a software random number, and reads a count value of the random number circuit 503 to extract a random R (a jackpot determination random number generated by the random number circuit 503). Then, a process of storing them in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (step S83). In step S83, the CPU 56 extracts a random 7 (see FIG. 25) value (a counter value for generating a special symbol variation pattern random number) as a software random number. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is secured. Further, a counter for generating a random number for variation pattern and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Further, the display of the special symbol hold memory display 18 is changed to a display showing the value of the hold memory number counter (step S84). Further, control for transmitting a start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S85). Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is used as a pointer. set. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29) (the same applies to other effect control commands).

  39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. The state where the special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the special symbol display unit 8 does not display the variation of the special symbol and the jackpot game is not executed. State.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the number of reserved memories (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S52). Then, the value of the reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S53). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To store. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes.

  Then, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number (random R) from the random number buffer area (step S60), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S61). The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined determination value (determination value set in the table illustrated in FIG. 26) with a jackpot determination random number and determines whether to win or not. It is a program that executes a process to perform. In this embodiment, as shown in the table of FIG. 26, there is no deviation in the big hit determination of step S61.

  When it is determined to be a big hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag (step S63). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S70).

  If it is not determined to be a big hit (that is, if it is determined to be a small hit), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set, and the time reduction is made. If the flag is set, the value of the hour / hour counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the hour / short state is decremented by 1 (steps S65 and S66). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, a time reduction end flag is set in order to shift the gaming state to the non-time reduction state when the variable display ends (steps S68 and S69). Then, the process proceeds to step S70.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number buffer area (step S340). Then, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table based on the variation pattern determination random number (step S341). The fluctuation pattern table is an area of the ROM 54 in which determination values are set in correspondence with the fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the big hit is determined, it is determined to use the special figure variation pattern # 1 for the big hit. Further, when it is determined that a small hit, it is determined to use any of the special figure variation patterns # 2 to # 93 for a small hit.

  In addition, when it is determined that it is a small hit, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (display result) to be displayed on the special symbol indicator 8 as “1”. Further, when it is determined that the game is a big hit, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (display result) to be displayed on the special symbol display 8 as “7”.

  The CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S41 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S342).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S344). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S34 is set. Also, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S41 is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S345). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S346).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S303). The updated value is updated (step S123). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S34 to end the variation of the special symbol, and performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the special symbol display 8. (Step S131). Further, control is performed to transmit a special symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S132).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (steps S133 and S134). Also, the number of times of opening (number of rounds), which is the number of times that the big winning opening can be opened in the big hit game, is set in the opening number counter (step S135), and the time before the round start (a new round is started) For example, a value corresponding to a notification time in the effect display device 9 is set (step S136). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S307) (step S137). Note that the number of rounds set in the release count counter is 16 corresponding to 16 rounds (16R).

  When the big hit flag is not set (that is, when it is a small hit) and the short time end flag is set, the short time end flag is reset and the short time flag is reset (steps S133, S138, S139). , S140). Then, control is performed to transmit a time-short end designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S141). Further, control is performed to transmit a small hitting start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S142), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-release process (step S304). S143).

  Next, the starting operation state will be described. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a table in which data relating to the starting operation state in the ROM 54 is set. Among these, FIG. 44 (A) shows a control table at the time of opening of an accessory for specifying the processing time during release of the accessory 20, and FIG. 44 (B) is an opening pattern table for specifying an opening pattern of the accessory 20. Is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (A), an accessory release table that is used when the number of releases of the accessory 20 is one is shown. However, the accessory 20 is displayed multiple times (for example, twice). A table for opening an accessory for opening may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A), in the accessory release time table, data indicating a value corresponding to the processing time during opening (the sum of the opening time of the accessory 20 and the closing time between opening), The head address (referred to as AAAA) of the open pattern table stored in the ROM 54 is set in order. Order means that data storage addresses are continuous.

  In this embodiment, the number of times of opening of the accessory 20 is 1, and the opening time of the accessory 20 is 1.5 seconds. In addition, since the value of the timer for measuring the processing time during release is updated every 2 ms (2 milliseconds), in the accessory release table (also in the release pattern table described later), (2 ms × (data value)) Data such that becomes time is set in hexadecimal. Moreover, since the number of times of opening of the accessory 20 is one and there is no closing time, the processing time during opening is the same as the opening time of the accessory 20. When the number of opening of the accessory 20 is multiple times (for example, twice), the processing time during opening is the same as the sum of the opening time and the closing time of the accessory 20 multiple times (for example, twice). It is.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (B), in the release pattern table (in this embodiment, the release pattern table in which the number of releases of the accessory 20 is 1), solenoid output data (= 01 (indicating ON) is sequentially displayed. )), Data of a value indicating the opening time, and solenoid output data (= 00 (indicating OFF)) are set. For example, when using an opening pattern table that is used when the number of opening of the accessory 20 is 2, the solenoid output data (= 01 (indicating ON)) and the data indicating the opening time are sequentially input. , Solenoid output data (= 00 (indicating OFF)), value data indicating closing time, solenoid output data (= 01 (indicating ON)), value data indicating opening time, solenoid output data (= 00 ( It may be set so that off))) is set.

  The CPU 56 controls the opening / closing of the accessory 20 in the starting operation state according to the data set in the release pattern table. The solenoid output data is data indicating the driving state of the opening solenoid 75 for opening the accessory 20. On indicates opening of the accessory 20 (driving solenoid 75 is driven), and off indicates closing of the accessory 20 (stopping operation of the opening solenoid 75).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process (step S304). In the pre-release processing, first, the CPU 56 sets the address of the bonus release table in a register (or RAM 55) (step S411). Then, the data of the set address and the data of the next address (the open time: see FIG. 44) are set in the open processing time timer (step S413). Also, the set address is incremented by +2 (step S414), and the data of that address and the data of the next address (the first address of the release pattern table: see FIG. 44) are set in the pointer formed in the RAM 55. (Step S415). In this embodiment, the data bus of the CPU 56 is 8 bits (1 byte). Since 2-byte data is handled in step S413, the address is incremented by +2 in step S414.

  Next, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S416). Here, 1-byte solenoid output data (= 01 (indicating ON)) is loaded (see FIG. 40B). The CPU 56 sets the loaded data in the port output RAM area (step S417). In the solenoid output process (step S32) shown in FIG. 24, the release solenoid 75 is driven based on the data set in the port output RAM area, and the accessory 20 is released. Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S418). The value of the pointer is an address where the second data in the release pattern table is stored. That is, the pointer points to the address where the second data in the release pattern table is stored.

  Further, the CPU 56 loads the data at the address pointed to by the pointer and the data at the next address (step S419). Here, 2-byte data indicating the release time is loaded (see FIG. 44B). Then, the loaded data is set in an on-time / off-time timer for measuring the opening time or closing time (step S421). The CPU 56 increments the pointer value by +2 (step S422). Therefore, the pointer points to the address where the third data in the release pattern table is stored.

  Next, the CPU 56 clears (initializes to 0) the game ball number counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the accessory 20 (step S423), and starts releasing the accessory 20 control. A bonus release start flag is set (step S424), and a post-opening time measurement timer for measuring an elapsed time after the bonus 20 is released is started (step S425). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing for releasing an accessory (step S305) (step S426).

  FIGS. 46 to 48 are flowcharts showing the processing for releasing an accessory (step S305). In the process during opening of the accessory, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the processing time timer during opening has already timed out (value is 0) (step S430). If timed out, the process proceeds to step S451.

  If the open processing time timer has not timed out, the value of the open processing time timer is decremented by 1 (step S431A). Further, the value of the on-time / off-time timer is decremented by 1 (step S431B). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the on-time / off-time timer has timed out (value has become 0) (step S432). If timed out, the process proceeds to step S442.

  If the on-time / off-time timer has not timed out, the rotating body control for rotating the rotating body 86 is executed (step S433). When the first winning combination winning switch 71a is turned on, that is, when a gaming ball winning at the first advance entrance 71 of the winning combination 20 is detected (step S434A), the value of the in-function gaming ball number counter is incremented by 1 ( In step S435A), control is performed to transmit the first prize winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S436A). When the second winning combination winning switch 72a is turned on, that is, when a gaming ball winning the second advancement entrance 72 of the winning combination 20 is detected (step S434B), the value of the in-function gaming ball number counter is incremented by 1 ( In step S435B, control is performed to transmit the second prize winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S436B).

  When the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (step S437), the value of the in-function game ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438).

  When the specific area switch 66a indicating that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 66A is turned on (step S439), the V winning flag is set (step S440), and the V winning designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is transmitted (step S441).

  In step S442, the CPU 56 loads data at the address indicated by the pointer. The loaded data is set in the port output RAM area (step S443). In this case, in this embodiment, since the number of times of opening of the accessory 20 in the starting operation state is 1, the loaded data is solenoid output data (= 00 (indicating OFF)). In addition, when the number of times of opening of the accessory 20 in the starting operation state is a plurality of times (for example, twice), the loaded data is solenoid output data (= 00 (indicating OFF)) or solenoid output data (= 01 (= Indicating ON)). For example, when the number of times of opening of the accessory 20 in the start operation state is two, when the processing of step S442 is first executed in the processing of releasing the accessory, solenoid output data (= 00 (indicating OFF)) When the process of step S442 is executed for the second time, the solenoid output data corresponding to the second release (= 01 (indicating ON)), and when the process of step S442 is executed for the third time Solenoid output data corresponding to the second closing (= 00 (indicating OFF)).

  Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S444), and loads the data at the address pointed to by the pointer and the data at the next address (step S445). If the loaded data is 0000 (end code: see FIG. 44B) (step S446), a value corresponding to the winning monitoring time (for example, 6 seconds) is set in the winning monitoring timer (step S447).

  If the loaded data is not 0000, the loaded data is set to an on / off time timer for measuring the opening time or closing time (step S448). Then, the CPU 56 sets the pointer value to +2 (step S449).

  In step S451, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the winning monitoring timer has timed out (value is 0). If the winning monitoring timer has not timed out, the value of the winning monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S452), and the process proceeds to step S434A.

  If the winning monitoring timer has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is 0 (step S453). If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S456A. When the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus becomes 0, the time measurement timer after the bonus release is reset (step S454). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-function close processing (step S306) (step S455).

  In step S456A, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a first storage unit release flag indicating that the first storage unit in the accessory 20 is being opened is set. If set, the process proceeds to step S456E. If it is not set, the CPU 56 opens the predetermined first storage unit based on the value of the time measurement timer after opening of the accessory (for example, after the opening of the accessory 20 (if the agent is released twice, the first accessory) It is confirmed whether or not 8 seconds) have elapsed (after opening) (step S456B). If the opening time of the 1st storage part has passed, CPU56 will control the 1st storage part to an open state by driving the 1st storage part solenoid 90a and moving the 1st storage member 93a (Step) S456C). And a 1st storage part open | release flag is set (step S456D), and it transfers to step S437.

  When the game ball is stored in the first storage part through the first path 71 of the accessory 20 through the first route, the processing of steps S456A to S456D is performed, whereby the accessory 20 It is released from the first reservoir after a predetermined time after opening and is guided to the rotating body 86 (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Then, when a winning is made to the specific winning opening 66A, it is detected by the specific area switch 66a in the process of step S439, and when it is discharged without winning the specific winning opening 66A, an accessory discharge switch 85a is processed in the process of step S437. Will be detected.

  In step S456E, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a second storage unit release flag indicating that the second storage unit in the accessory 20 is being opened is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S456I. If it is not set, the CPU 56 determines the opening time of the predetermined second storage unit based on the value of the time measuring timer after opening of the accessory (for example, after the opening of the accessory 20 (if it is opened twice, the first accessory) It is confirmed whether or not 12 seconds) have elapsed (after opening) (step S456F). If the opening time of the second storage part has elapsed, the CPU 56 controls the second storage part to the open state by driving the second storage part solenoid 90b to move the second storage member 93b (step). S456G). And a 2nd storage part open | release flag is set (step S456H), and it transfers to step S437.

  In step S456I, the CPU 56 determines the movable time of the predetermined movable member 77 based on the value of the post-opening time measurement timer (for example, after the pre-opening of the precious material 20 (after the first full opening of the post when opening twice). 13 seconds) is checked. If the movable time of the movable member 77 has elapsed, the movable member control for moving the movable member 77 is executed (step S456J). Then, control goes to a step S437.

  When the game ball is stored in the second storage part through the second path 72 through the second entrance 72 of the accessory 20, the processing of steps S <b> 456 </ b> E to S <b> 456 </ b> J is performed, thereby the accessory 20. After being released from the second storage portion after a predetermined time after being opened, the movable member 77 is moved in a state of being inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left, thereby being guided to the rotating body 86 through the movable member 77 ( (Refer FIG. 12, FIG. 13). Then, when a winning is made to the specific winning opening 66A, it is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a in the process of step S437 and detected by the specific area switch 66a in the process of step S439, and discharged without winning the specific winning opening 66A. In such a case, it is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a in the process of step S437.

  In this embodiment, after the time-out processing time timer times out until the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus game becomes 0, that is, until all the game balls in the bonus game 20 are discharged. In the processing during opening, the detection signals of the prize winning switches 71a and 72a, the detection signal of the accessory discharging switch 85a, and the detection signal of the V winning prize switch 22 are checked, but after the opening processing time timer times out. These checks are executed in a process other than the process during opening of an accessory (for example, another process executed between the process during opening of an accessory in step S305 and the process after the closing of an accessory in step S306). May be.

  In this embodiment, the starting operation state continues until the processing time timer during opening times out. However, when it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have won the bonus item 20 in the starting operation state, the starting operation state is released. Even if the intermediate processing time timer has not timed out, the start operation state may be terminated. For example, when the CPU 56 confirms that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, at least one by each of the winning combination winning prize switches 71a and 72a) have won the winning combination 20 by the winning prize winning switches 71a and 72a, the release is performed. Set the middle processing time timer to 0.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the rotator control. In the rotating body control, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the rotating body 86 is operating (rotating body operating) (whether or not the rotating body operating flag is set) (step S211). If not in operation, it is confirmed whether or not the accessory release start flag is set (step S212). If the accessory release start flag is set, the accessory release start flag is reset (step S213) and the driving of the rotating body 86 is started (step S214). That is, the rotating body drive motor 87 is rotated. Further, a rotating body operating flag indicating that the rotating body is operating is set (step S215). In this embodiment, the case where the driving of the rotating body 86 is started when the accessory 20 is opened is shown. You may control as follows. In addition, for example, the rotating body 86 may always be driven with a constant operation after the gaming machine 1 is turned on regardless of the gaming state.

  When the rotating body is operating (Y in step S211), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the rotating body operation stop request flag for requesting the operation stop of the rotating body 86 is set (step S216). When the rotation body operation stop request flag is set, the CPU 56 stops driving the rotation body drive motor 87 to stop the rotation of the rotation body 86 (step S217) and resets the rotation body operation flag. (Step S218). Then, a rotating body initial position setting request flag for requesting that the rotating body 86 be returned to the initial position is set (step S219).

  The rotating body operation stop request flag is set in the post-processing of the accessory closing. The rotating body initial position setting request flag is referred to in the initial position control process in step S33.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing movable member control. In the movable member control, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the movable member 77 is operating (moving member is operating) (whether or not the moving member operating flag is set) (step S221). If it is not in operation, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the movable member operated flag indicating that the movable member 77 has already been moved is set (step S222). If the movable member operated flag is not set, the CPU 56 drives the movable member drive motor 77B and starts moving the movable member 77 (step S223). In this case, as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the movable member 77 is movable so as to be inclined obliquely from the upper right in the accessory 20 to the lower left in the accessory 20. To do. As will be described later, the decorative member 78 is moved in conjunction with the production control microcomputer 100, so that the decorative member 78 overlaps the front of the movable member 77 as shown in FIGS. It moves in conjunction with the state. Further, a movable member operating flag indicating that the movable member is operating is set (step S224).

  When the movable member is operating (Y in step S221), the CPU 56 checks whether or not an ON signal from the lower position sensor 91b is detected (step S225). When detecting the ON signal from the lower position sensor 91b, the CPU 56 stops driving the movable member drive motor 77B and stops the movement of the movable member 77 (step S226). Further, the movable member operating flag is reset (step S227), and the movable member operated flag is set (step S228). Then, a movable member initial position setting request flag for requesting that the movable member 77 be returned to the initial position is set (step S229).

  In this embodiment, when the left end portion of the movable member 77 is moved to the lowest position and the movement is stopped in step S226, the movable member initial position setting request flag is set in step S229. Thus, the process of immediately returning the movable member 77 to the initial position is executed in the initial position control process of step S33.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the post-completion processing (step S306). In the post-completion processing, the CPU 56 sets a rotating body operation stop request flag referred to in the rotating body control shown in FIG. 49 (step S1461). Further, the rotating body control is executed (step S1462). Further, control for transmitting a small hitting end designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S 1463). Further, the small hit flag is reset (step S1464).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S1465). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the V winning flag (step S1466), and sets the number of times of opening (number of rounds), which is the number of times that a big winning opening can be opened in the big hit game, to the number of times of opening game. (Step S1467). In addition, a value corresponding to the time before the start of the round (the time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the new round is started, for example) is set in the timer before the round start (step S1468). Also, a big hit flag is set (step S1469), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S1470). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S307) (step S1471).

  If the V winning flag is not set in step S1465, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S1472).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the initial position control process in step S33. In the initial position control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the movable member initial position setting flag is set (step S1241). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1247. If not set, it is checked whether or not the movable member initial position setting request flag is set (step S1242). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1250. If set, the movable member initial position setting request flag is reset (step S1243), and the second reservoir is closed by driving the second reservoir solenoid 90b to move the second reservoir 93b. The state is returned (step S1244). Next, the CPU 56 drives the movable member drive motor 77B to start moving the movable member 77 (step S1245). In this case, the CPU 56 drives the movable member drive motor 77B in the direction opposite to the movable member control executed in the accessory release process. Therefore, the movable member 77 is movable so as to return to a horizontal state above the inside of the accessory 20 again from a state where it is inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left inside the accessory 20. If the movable member drive motor 77B is already being driven, the CPU 56 continues the drive. Further, the moving member initial position setting flag is set (step S1246).

  When the upper position sensor 91a is turned on (a detection signal is output from the upper position sensor 91a), the drive of the movable member drive motor 77B is stopped in order to stop the movement of the movable member 77 (steps S1247 and S1248). . Further, the movable member initial position setting flag is reset (step S1249).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the rotating body initial position setting flag is set (step S1250). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1256. If it is not set, it is checked whether or not the rotating body initial position setting request flag is set (step S1251). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If it is set, the rotary body initial position setting request flag is reset (step S1252), and the first reservoir is closed by driving the first reservoir solenoid 90a to move the first reservoir 93a. The state is returned (step S1253). Next, the CPU 56 drives the rotating body drive motor 87 and starts driving the rotating body 86 (step S1254). If the rotating body drive motor 87 is already being driven, the CPU 56 continues the drive. Further, a rotating body initial position setting flag is set (step S1255).

  When the rotating body position sensor 87a is turned on (a detection signal is output from the rotating body position sensor 87a), the driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 is stopped in order to stop the driving of the rotating body 86 (step S1256). S1257). Further, the rotating body initial position setting flag is reset (step S1258).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S307) executed before each round in the big hit game (first big hit game and second big hit game). In the pre-opening process for the special winning opening, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display command for opening the special winning opening if it has not transmitted the display command for opening the special winning opening (steps S470 and S471). Also, the value of the timer before the round start is decremented by 1 (step S472). If the pre-round start timer times out (the value of the pre-round start timer is 0) (step S473), the winning number counter is initialized (step S474). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Then, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set in the opening time timer (step S475). In addition, the special winning opening (act) is controlled to be open. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 16 (step S477). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S308) (step S478).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S308). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the opening time timer has timed out (step S481). If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S499. If the opening time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning counter is 10 (step S482). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to step S499. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big prize opening is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (steps S486 and S488).

  In step S499, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Then, control is performed to transmit a display command after opening the big winning opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S500), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the post winning closing process (step S309). Update (step S501).

  In this embodiment, the case where the big winning opening is provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus (the accessory) 20 is shown, but in the big hit game using the variable winning ball apparatus 20 as the big winning opening. The variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be opened and closed. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 controls the open doors 76A and 76B to be in the open state by driving the open solenoid 75 in step S477 of the pre-opening process for the big prize opening. Then, in step S486 of the big prize opening opening process, it is confirmed whether or not the prize winning switch 71a, 72a is turned on, and in step S499, the driving of the opening solenoid 75 is stopped and the opening doors 76A, 76B are opened again. You may make it control to a closed state. In addition, a grand prize winning opening (referred to as a lower prize winning opening) constituted by using the opening / closing plate 16 and a big winning prize opening (referred to as an upper winning prize opening) constituted by using a variable winning ball apparatus (function) 20 Both may be used. In this case, for example, you may make it switch the big prize opening opened by a round. For example, the lower big prize opening may be controlled to be opened in the odd-numbered round, and the lower big prize opening may be controlled to be opened in the even-numbered round.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the post-close closing process (step S309). In the process after closing the big prize opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (step S513). If the value of the opening number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S517 (step S514). When the value of the number-of-releases counter is 0, that is, when all rounds in the big hit game are finished, the big hit flag is reset (step S521). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S310) (step S526).

  In this embodiment, when the big hit game is over, there may be a short time state (a state in which the special symbol variation time is shortened), but this state is the number of times indicated by the value set in the short time number counter. Continue until the special symbol changes.

  In step S517, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the pre-round start time (time for notifying, for example, the effect display device 9 that a new round is started) in the pre-round start timer (step S517), The value of the symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S307) (step S518).

  In addition, it is good also as shifting to the next round on condition that the game ball won in the special area in the big winning opening (V winning).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S310). In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S531). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S534. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S532). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S533), and the processing is ended.

  In step S534, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S535). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S536). If the time reduction flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S541. If the hourly flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S537). Then, the CPU 56 sets the number of time reductions in the time reduction number counter according to whether or not the V winning flag is set (steps S538 and S539). In step S541, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set. Then, the CPU 56 sets the number of time reductions in the time reduction number counter according to whether or not the V winning flag is set (steps S542 and S543).

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the number of time reductions set in the time reduction number counter. As shown in FIG. 57, when the hourly flag and the V winning flag are set (that is, when the game ball wins V in the small hit game in the advantageous state), in the special symbol process, the hourly number counter is displayed. 10 indicating that the number of time reductions is 10 is set (steps S536, S537, and S539). Then, the CPU 56 resets the V winning flag (step S540). As shown in FIG. 57, the special symbol process is performed when the time reduction flag is set and the V winning flag is not set (that is, when it is determined to be a big hit in steps S61 and S62 in an advantageous state). Then, 15 indicating that the number of time reductions is 15 is set in the time reduction number counter (steps S536, S537, S538). Then, control goes to a step S546.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 57, when the hourly flag is not set and the V winning flag is set (that is, when the game ball wins V in the small hit game in the normal state), the special symbol In the process processing, 2 indicating that the number of time reductions is 2 is set in the time reduction number counter (steps S536, S541, and S543). Then, the CPU 56 resets the V winning flag (step S544), and proceeds to step S545. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when the time reduction flag and the V winning flag are not set (that is, in the normal state, when it is determined to be a big hit in steps S61 and S62), the special symbol process processing is time reduction. The number counter is set to 5 indicating that the number of time reductions is 5 (steps S536, S541, S542). Then, control goes to a step S545.

  In step S545, a time reduction flag is set (step S545). In step S546, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the time reduction number set in steps S538, S539, S542, and S543.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S547).

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S111). A switch passage process (steps S112 to S114) is executed.

  In the gate switch passage process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) (step S112). If the maximum value has not been reached (N in step S112), the CPU 56 determines the reach random number (random 1), which is a software random number, the random number for determining the normal symbol variation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for determining the normal symbol variation pattern. (Random 3), Random number for normal symbol determination (Random 4) and Random number for type determination per random symbol (Random 5) are extracted, and the storage area (Normal symbol determination buffer corresponding to the value of the number of passing gates) ) Is stored (step S113). Then, the CPU 56 increments the count value of the gate passage storage counter by 1 (step S114). Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S100 to S105 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S100): The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100) In the case where the normal symbol display 10 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is not in the open / close operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. ) Confirms the value of the number of passages through the gate. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S101).

  Normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S101): A variation pattern of variable display of a regular symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) at the time of winning a prize to the gate 32 Selection is made from among a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the extracted random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern (one of display random numbers). Also, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (ordinary symbol variation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer, the normal symbol process timer is started. . Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S102).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S102): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10. In addition, an effect control command (ordinary symbol confirmation designation command) for designating stop of variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Then, the normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S103).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step S103): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. To do. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is in an advantageous state (short-time state). If it is in an advantageous state, the release pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 61) in the advantageous state is selected. In the normal state (non-short-time state), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 61) in the normal state is selected, and the selected opening pattern is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S104).

  Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S104): This is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 560 drives the movable part solenoid 62 to open the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the process for releasing the normal electric accessory (step S105).

  Normal electric accessory opening process (step S105): Executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is 5. The game control microcomputer 560 measures the opening time, and when the opening time has elapsed, stops the driving of the movable part solenoid 62 and closes the ordinary electric accessory. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) corresponding to the normal symbol normal process (step S100).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S124). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step S124), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S124), the CPU 56 determines the reach determination random number, the normal symbol variation pattern type determining random number, or the normal random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1. The values of the random number for determining the symbol variation pattern, the random number for determining per ordinary symbol, and the random number for determining the type per common symbol are read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S125). Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S126). That is, the reach determination random number, the normal symbol variation pattern type determination random number, the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number, or the ordinary random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) The per-symbol determination random number and the normal per-type determination random number value are stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = n−1. Therefore, the reach determination random number, the normal symbol variation pattern type determination random number, the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number, the regular symbol variation random number and the normal symbol stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number The order in which the value of the random number for hit type determination is extracted always matches the order of the number of stored gate passages = 1, 2, 3 and 4.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random symbol for normal symbol determination and the random number for type determination per common symbol from the random number storage buffer (step S127), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value. A hit determination process is executed (step S128).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal hit determination process. As shown in FIG. 60, in the normal symbol determination process, the CPU 56 first sets a universal symbol determination table (see FIG. 27) used in the hit determination, and the normal symbol random number value read in step S127. Is compared with the hit determination value set in the normal hit determination table, and it is determined that the hit is a normal hit or not (step S91).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 25, the random number value for normal symbol determination is updated in the range of 0 to 259. Then, when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. 25, when the read random number for normal symbol determination is a value of 0 to 129, it is determined as “per normal symbol” and read. When the random number value for determination per normal symbol is 130 to 259, it is determined as “out of”. Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be hit in the normal symbol determination (ordinary symbol winning probability) is ½.

  As described above, regardless of whether the gaming state is the advantageous state or the normal state, the winning is always a probability of 1/2. When the CPU 56 determines “per normal symbol” (Y in step S92), the CPU 56 sets a normal symbol per flag (step S93), and displays “5” on the normal symbol display 10. The stop symbol (display result) is determined. If it is determined to be “displaced” (N in step S92), “0” is determined as a stop symbol (display result) of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and the process ends.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S94). If the hour / hour flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the hour / hour ordinary map type determination table (see FIG. 28B) as a table used for the normal map type determination (step S95). If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the normal time normal type classification determination table (see FIG. 28A) (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 compares the random number value for determining the type per common map read out in step S127 with the determination value set in the general map type determination table set in steps S95 and S96, and determines the type per normal map. It is determined to be per long or short map (step S97).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, in the case of the short-time state, if it is determined that it is per ordinary figure, it is determined that it is per long long figure with a probability of 100%. In the normal state, if it is determined to be per normal map, it is determined to be per long normal map with a probability of 3%, and it is determined to be per short normal map with a probability of 97%. The

  Then, when it is determined that the long common symbol is hit (Y in Step S98), the CPU 56 sets a long common symbol flag indicating that the long common symbol is awarded (Step S99).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 59, thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S102) (step S129).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S102) in the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the universal symbol flag is set (step S181). If the flag for the normal map is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the flag for the long map is set (step S182). If the long usual figure is set, the CPU 56 sets a long common figure variation pattern type determination table (see FIG. 32A) as a table used for determining the common figure variation pattern type (see FIG. 32A). Step S183).

  When the flag for the normal map is not set (N in step S181) or the flag for the long map is not set (N in step S182), the CPU 56 reads the reach determination random number from the random number storage buffer. The read reach random number is compared with the determination value of the reach determination table (see FIG. 33), and the reach effect is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol executed in synchronization with the normal symbol change display. It is determined whether or not to perform (step S184).

  When it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (Y in step S185), the CPU 56 uses the reach variation pattern type determination table for reach / short with normal map as a table used to determine the normal pattern variation pattern type ( (See FIG. 32B) (step S186). Then, control goes to a step S194.

  When it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (N in Step S185), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (Step S187). If the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gate passing memory number is 3 or more (step S188). Note that the value of the gate passing memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the gate passing memory number counter. If the gate passing memory number is 3 or more, the CPU 56 determines the common map variation pattern type # 5 as the common map variation pattern type (step S189). Then, control goes to a step S195. If the number of stored passages through the gate is not 3 or more, the CPU 56 determines the common map variation pattern type # 4 as the common map variation pattern type (step S190). Then, control goes to a step S195.

  If the time reduction flag is not set in step S187, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gate passing memory number is 3 or more (step S191). If the gate passing memory number is 3 or more, the CPU 56 determines the common map variation pattern type # 2 as the common map variation pattern type (step S192). Then, control goes to a step S195. If the gate passing memory number is not 3 or more, the CPU 56 uses the reach-less variation / short-variable variation pattern type determination table (see FIG. 32C) as a table used to determine the normal variation pattern type. Is set (step S193). Then, control goes to a step S194.

  In step S194, the CPU 56 reads the random number for determining the normal pattern variation pattern type from the random number storage buffer, and determines the random number value of the read random number for determining the normal pattern variation pattern type and the variation pattern type determination set in steps S183, S186, and S193. The general-purpose variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the determination value of the table. In step S195, a normal fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 30 and 31) corresponding to the normal fluctuation pattern type determined in steps S189, S190, S192, and S194 is set (step S195). Then, the random number for determining the normal symbol variation pattern is read out from the random number storage buffer, and the random number value for the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number read is compared with the determination value of the set normal symbol variation pattern table to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. Is determined (step S196).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the variation time of the ordinary symbol specified by the ordinary symbol variation pattern in the ordinary symbol process timer, and starts the ordinary symbol process timer (step S197). In addition, the CPU 56 sends the display result commands (BC00 (H) to BC02 (H) shown in FIG. 37) to the effect control microcomputer 100 together with the normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the common symbol variation pattern determined in step S196. Transmission control is performed (step S198).

  Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S102) (step S199).

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the common symbol variation pattern table (when the common symbol variation pattern setting process is determined as the common symbol variation pattern and when the short symbol per symbol is determined) Using the common pattern (steps S184 to S193 and S194 to S196), the common pattern variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern type determination table (see FIG. 30) and the variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 32B and 32C).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S102). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S271). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S271), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S272).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S271), the CPU 56 stops the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 (step S273). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S274).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the usual figure hit flag is set (step S275). If the normal symbol flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol process time in the normal symbol process timer (time to stop displaying the normal symbol per symbol) (step S276). If the normal symbol hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets a normal symbol loss symbol display time (time for stopping the normal symbol loss time) in the normal symbol process timer (step S277). In step S277, as the normal symbol loss symbol display time, a time substantially the same as the time obtained by adding the time during which the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to open to the normal symbol display time per symbol is set.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S103) (step S277).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S103). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S151). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S151), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S152).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol per symbol display time or the normal symbol losing symbol display time elapses (Y in step S151), the CPU 56 determines whether the per symbol symbol is set. Is confirmed (step S153).

  When the normal symbol hit flag is set (Y in step S153), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S104). (Step S159).

  If it is determined in step S153 that the normal symbol hit flag is not set (N in step S153), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100) (specifically, Is updated to “0”) (step S160).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release pre-processing (step S104). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, first, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the long universal winning flag is set (step S161). If the long regular hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 5.0 seconds in the normal electric timer as the starter movable time for moving the movable portion 63 and controlling the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 to the open state. (Step S162). If the long normal hit flag is not set (that is, if it is per short normal), the CPU 56 sets 0.1 seconds as the starter moving time in the normal electric timer (step S163).

  Next, the CPU 56 opens the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 by driving the movable part solenoid 62 to advance the movable part 63 (step S164). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric open process (step S105) (step S165).

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal electric accessory opening (step S105). In the process of releasing the normal electric utility item, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal electric service timer (step S170), and whether or not the value of the normal electric service timer has become 0 (that is, the normal electric service timer has timed out). Whether or not) (step S171). If the value of the ordinary electronic timer is not 0, the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the ordinary electric timer is 0, the CPU 56 stops driving the movable part solenoid 62 and closes the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 by moving the movable part 63 backward (step S172). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “0”) corresponding to the normal symbol normal process (step S100) (step S173).

  Next, processing relating to award ball payout will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer. FIG. 66 shows only switches that detect a game ball and that will pay out a prize ball by winning. As shown in FIG. 66, the bits 0 to 6 of the input port 0 include the count switch 23, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, the first winning winning combination switch 71a, the winning opening switch 39a, the winning opening switch 38a, respectively. Detection signals from the winning opening switch 33a and the start opening switch 60 are input. The input port 0 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  Next, payout control commands (payout control signals) transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout control signal output from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that is in an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball number command is transmitted (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request). The 4-bit prize ball number signal is a signal (prize ball number command) output for designating the number of game balls (0 to 15) to be paid out.

  68 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, the prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. . The output circuit 67 is installed outside the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. 21 on the main board 31 (not shown in FIG. 21). Further, on the payout control board 37, an output circuit 67 is provided in the preceding stage of the input port in the payout control microcomputer.

  FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output the payout control signal. As shown in FIG. 69, a winning detection switch (count switch 23, second winning combination winning switch 72a, first winning winning combination switch 71a, winning opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a, start opening switch 60) is a winning game ball. The game control microcomputer 560 turns on the award ball REQ signal and turns the output state of the award ball number signal in accordance with the winning. Make the state according to the number. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine based on a detection signal from the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the content of the total number of winning balls stored in the backup RAM. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 60, four prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the prize port switches 33a, 38a, 39a, ten prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the first prize winning switch 71a, and the second prize winning switch 72a, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in reality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which the signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, but by bidirectional communication, A prize ball number signal may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. When performing two-way communication, for example, the payout control microcomputer transmits an ACK signal (response signal) to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to reception of the prize ball REQ signal, or receives a prize ball number signal. An ACK signal indicating that the game has been performed is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the on state of the detection signal of each switch related to the detection of the game ball continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms, but if the switch is detected to be turned on in both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms ago, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The port buffer before two times is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (assumed to be 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (2 ms before) is stored. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. Further, the bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times in advance corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 5 of input port 0 shown in FIG. 66 is set in bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch on buffer two times before. The

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the switch process of step S21 in the game control process. In the switch process, the CPU 56 sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 16 bits of the port buffer and the previous 16 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, the data of the input port 0 and the input port 1 are input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the input port 1 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 16 bits of the port buffer and the previous 16 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the nine switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. It is assumed that bits 0 to 6 of input port 1 are fixed to 0. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 and the input port 1 is calculated in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and the input port 1 is used. In addition, a bit in which the state 2 ms before has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The CPU 56 stores the result of the logical product operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the CPU 56 can confirm that the switch detection signal corresponding to the bit that is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms. It can be done.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S1341) and a prize ball control process (step S1342).

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 73 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball is to be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. Note that the switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch in the input port 0 and the input port 1 is input (see FIG. 66).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process in step S1341. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start address of the winning ball number table as a pointer (step S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S353).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S355). . Further, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 (step S356).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is not 0 (N in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to step S362. If the calculation result in step S355 is 0 (Y in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S359), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S354 (step S360).

  In step S362, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is a count switch input bit determination value. That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed in step S361 that the count switch 23 is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the count switch 23).

  When the switch input bit determination value is the count switch input bit determination value (Y in step S362), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more ( Step S363). That the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more means that the processing after the pre-opening process of the big winning opening in step S307 is executed in the special symbol process. In other words, it means that a big hit game is being played. Here, during the big hit game, it is a period from the start of the big hit display to the end of the big hit end processing. In other words, the value of the special symbol process flag being 7 or more indicates that there is a possibility that control for opening the big prize opening may be performed when the game control is normally executed. .

  When the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more (Y in step S363), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the prize ball number) as a prize ball. The added value is set (step S368), and the prize ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S369). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S357.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 7 is a state where the big hit game is not executed and the control for opening the big winning opening is not executed. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in such a state, it means that an abnormal prize has occurred at the big prize opening or that the detection signal from the count switch 23 has a noise over a long period (over 4 ms). Means that you got on. Therefore, when it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 8 (N in step S363), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute control. That is, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the count switch 23 is turned on is not executed (the processing in steps S368 and S369 is skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the count switch input bit determination value (N in step S362), the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is the start port switch input bit determination. It is confirmed whether or not it is a value (step S366). That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed in step S361 that the start port switch 60 is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the start port switch 60).

  If the switch input bit determination value is the start port switch input bit determination value (Y in step S366), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4 or more. (Step S367). That the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4 or more means that in the normal symbol process, the normal electric accessory release pre-processing in step S104 or the normal electric accessory release process in step S105 is being executed. To do. That is, it means that the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61) is being opened and closed.

  If the switch input bit determination value is not the start port switch input bit determination value (N in step S366), and if the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4 or more (Y in step S367), the game control micro The computer 560 sets the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the prize ball number) as a prize ball addition value (step S368), and the prize ball addition value is a 16-bit value formed in the RAM 55. It is added to the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S369). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 4 or more is a state where the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is not opened. If it is detected that the start port switch 60 is turned on in such a state, it means that an abnormal winning has occurred at the start winning port, or that a detection signal from the starting port switch 60 has been detected for a long time (over 4 ms). It means that a lot of noise got on. Therefore, when it is detected that the start port switch 60 is turned on in a state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is less than 4 (N in step S367), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute the control. In other words, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the start port switch 60 is turned on is not executed (steps S368 and S369 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  In the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag, but actually opens the big winning opening. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on when the count switch 23 is not turned on, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on may not be executed. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. Since the big winning opening is opened or closed over a plurality of rounds, it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning has occurred by judging whether or not the actual winning opening is controlled. To be complicated.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the big prize opening and the position where the count switch 23 is installed, it is determined whether or not the control for actually opening the big prize opening is performed, and whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred. In determining whether or not, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won a prize winning slot immediately before closing after performing a control for closing the prize winning opening. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the big prize opening to the position where the count switch 23 is installed. In other words, it is necessary to start the determination as to whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred after a certain period of time has passed since the control for actually closing the special winning opening is performed. This also complicates the processing.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S1342. In the winning ball control process, the CPU 56 confirms the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S371). If the value is 0, the process ends. If it is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S372). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S373). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S374). Then, the contents of the prize ball number buffer are set in the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal (step S375). Further, “1” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (step S376).

  A prize ball REQ signal is output by the processing of step S376. That is, the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. In addition, a prize ball number signal is output by the process of step S375 (see FIG. 67). In this embodiment, the maximum prize ball command value is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating a payout number of “15” at the maximum is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  When the winning ball number signal is transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts the contents of the winning ball number buffer (the winning ball payout number commanded to the payout control means) from the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S377). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets an on period of the prize ball REQ signal. Specifically, an initial value is set in the wait counter (step S378). Then, the value of the wait counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (steps S379 and S380). When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the on period is terminated.

  That is, “0” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (step S381), and 00 (H) is set to the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal. (Step S382).

  When the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37 receives the prize ball number signal, it drives the payout device 97 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball number signal is paid out.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notifying process in step S23. In the abnormality notification process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set (step S251). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in the main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 23). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S255. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S252). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S253 and S254).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more (step S255). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more (Y in step S255), the game is in a big hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big prize opening, so the process proceeds to the process of step S261 without performing the process of confirming the abnormal winning to the big prize opening.

  A state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 7 is a state where no big hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the following confirmation process for abnormal winning in the special winning opening is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 7 (N in step S255), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S256). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (01 (H), see FIG. 73) (step S257). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S258), it is determined that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred, an abnormal winning notification flag is set, and an abnormal winning notification is designated on the effect control board 80. Control to transmit a command is performed (steps S258A and S259). If the operation result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S258), it is determined that no abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S261.

  In step S261, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4 or more (step S261). The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4 or more is a state in which the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning ball device 61) is opened and closed. If it is in such a state (Y of step S261), since there is a possibility that the game ball will win the start winning opening, the process proceeds to step S266.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 4 or more (the state where it is less than 4) (N in step S261) is a state where the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 61) is not opened or closed. If there is a game ball winning at the start winning opening in such a state, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the confirmation process of the abnormal winning to the start winning opening shown below is performed. Note that it may be determined whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 5 in the process of step S261. In that case, since the determination result is “Y” only in the open state in the opening / closing operation, it is possible to more strictly determine whether or not the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the closed state.

  That is, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is less than 4 (N in step S261), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S262). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes a logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the start port switch input bit determination value (10 (H), see FIG. 73) (step S263). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 10 (H), that is, when the start port switch 60 is on, the logical product operation result is 10 (H). When the start port switch 60 is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S264), the game ball is placed in the start winning opening despite the start winning opening being in a state other than the open state (including the state of the predetermined interval period). Is the case where the prize is won. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value of the winning cumulative number counter (step S264A), and whether or not the value of the winning cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example). (Step S264B). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormal winning at the start winning opening has occurred, sets an abnormal winning notification flag (step S264C), and starts the effect control board 80 with the start. Control is performed to transmit a winning abnormality notification designation command (step S265). If the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S264), or if the value of the winning cumulative number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (N in step S264B), no abnormal winning has occurred in the start winning opening. And the process proceeds to step S266.

  In step S266, it is confirmed whether or not any other abnormal state in the gaming machine has been detected. For example, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a 12V short-circuit error, magnetic sensor sensing, or photosensor error described later has been detected. If an abnormal state is detected, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification flag corresponding to the detected abnormality type (step S267), and transmits an abnormality notification command corresponding to the detected abnormality type to the effect control board 80. Control is performed (step S268).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a first decorative symbol display process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol display processing, the effect control CPU 101 receives the general variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the first decorative symbol provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. In the display area, variable display of the first decorative symbol (in this embodiment, display in which the first decorative symbol is alternately lit in blue and white) is executed. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 starts variable display of the first decorative symbol when variable display of the normal symbol is started (specifically, when a normal variation pattern command is received). When the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped (specifically, when the normal symbol confirmation designation command is received), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is stopped to synchronize with the variable symbol normal display. The variable display of the first decorative design is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a second decorative symbol display process (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol display process, the effect control CPU 101 receives the special graphic variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the second decorative symbol provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the display area, variable display of the second decorative design (in this embodiment, display in which the second decorative design is alternately lit in blue and white) is executed. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 starts variable display of the second decorative symbol when the variable symbol special symbol display is started (specifically, when the special symbol variation pattern command is received). When the special symbol variable display is stopped (specifically, when the special symbol confirmation designation command is received), the second decorative symbol variable display is stopped to synchronize with the special symbol variable display. The variable display of the second decorative design is executed.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) (step S706). Further, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S707). Further, a decorative member initial position control process, which is a process for setting the position of the decorative member 78 provided in the accessory 20 to the initial position, is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 37) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  79 to 82 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S610). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S611). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S612). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a usual figure variation pattern command (step S613), the effect control CPU 101 stores the ordinary figure variation pattern command in the ordinary figure variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM ( In step S614), a normal variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S615). Also, a time measurement timer after receiving the normal pattern change pattern command for measuring the elapsed time after receiving the normal pattern change pattern command is started (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is an ordinary figure display result command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the ordinary figure display result command in an ordinary figure display result command storage area formed in the RAM ( In step S618), a normal chart display result command reception flag is set (step S619).

  Further, when the special figure fluctuation pattern command is received (step S620), the effect control CPU 101 stores the special figure fluctuation pattern command in the special figure fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S620). S621), a special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a special figure display result command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the special figure display result command in a special figure display result command storage area formed in the RAM. Then, a special figure display result command reception flag is set (step S625).

  If the received effect control command is a normal symbol confirmation designation command (step S626), the effect control CPU 101 sets a general symbol confirmation command reception flag (step S627).

  If the received effect control command is a special symbol confirmation designation command (step S628), the effect control CPU 101 sets a special figure confirmation command reception flag (step S629).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step S630), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S631). If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step S632), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step S633).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S634), the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S635). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Further, an initial notification flag is set (step S636), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S637). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, when the initialization notification is performed, the abnormality notification designation command (abnormality notification designation command or start prize abnormality notification designation command) is not received.

  Further, if the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S638), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S639).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S640), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S641). If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (step S642), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (step S643).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (step S644), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S645). If the received effect control command is a start prize abnormality notification designation command (step S646), a start prize abnormality notification designation command reception flag is set (step S647).

  If the received effect control command is the first prize winning designation command (step S648), the first prize winning designation command reception flag is set (step S649). If the received effect control command is the second prize winning designation command (step S650), the first prize winning designation command reception flag is set (step S651). If the received effect control command is a V prize designation command (step S652), the effect control CPU 101 sets a V prize designation command reception flag (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is a short time number designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 stores the short time number designation command in the short time number designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S655). . Further, if the received effect control command is a time-short end designation command (step S656), the effect control CPU 101 has a chance to indicate that it is during the execution time of the chance time effect that is executed while the gaming state is in the time-short state. The time flag is reset (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S658). Then, the process proceeds to step S610.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S811 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the universal pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the normal variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) according to the usual pattern change pattern received in the change pattern command reception waiting process.

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern of the normal symbol and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (ordinary symbol confirmation designation command) instructing to stop the variation of the ordinary symbol, the variation of the effect symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is displayed. Control to display and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal figure display process (step S804) or the normal figure loss display process (step S805).

  Normal map display processing (step S804): When the long normal map is displayed, control for displaying a screen for notifying the occurrence of the normal map on the effect display device 9 is performed after the end of the variation time. When the special figure variation pattern command is received within the predetermined period, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect start process (step S806). If the special figure variation pattern command is not received within the predetermined period, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure loss display process (step S811).

  Universal map loss display processing (step S805): Control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the general map loss on the effect display device 9 after the end of the change time when the normal map loss or short normal map is reached. Do. When the special figure variation pattern command is received within the predetermined period, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect start process (step S806). If the special figure variation pattern command is not received within the predetermined period, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Special figure corresponding effect start processing (step S806): Control is performed so as to start the special figure corresponding effect that is performed in response to the change display of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect processing (step S807) according to the special figure fluctuation pattern received in the normal figure display process or the general figure loss display process.

  Special figure corresponding effect processing (step S807): Control is performed to continue the special figure corresponding effect over the period of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern of the special symbol. When the variation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect stop process (step S808).

  Special figure corresponding effect stop processing (step S808): Based on the reception of the effect control command (special symbol confirmation designation command) instructing the special symbol variation stop, the special figure corresponding effect is stopped. If it is a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure big hit display process (step S810). If it is a small hit, the value of the effect control process is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game processing (step S809).

  Small hit game processing (step S809): Control during the small hit game is performed. For example, in the effect display device 9, a display effect corresponding to the small hit game is performed. When the V winning designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure jackpot display process (step S810). If the V winning designation command is not received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure losing display process (step S811).

  Special figure jackpot display process (step S810): Control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a special figure big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S812).

  Special figure loss display processing (step S811): Control is performed to display a screen for notifying the production display device 9 of the occurrence of special figure loss. If the normal symbol variation display is in progress at the end of the special figure loss display period, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special production (step S814). If the normal symbol variation display is not in progress at the end of the special figure loss display period, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit game processing (step S812): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. When the big hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end processing (step S813).

  Big hit end process (step S813): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. When the normal symbol variation display is in progress at the end of the jackpot end notification effect (ending effect), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special effect (step S814). If the normal symbol variation display is not in progress at the end of the ending effect period, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Special effect processing (step S814): When the special symbol fluctuation display is in progress at the end of the special figure losing display or at the end of the ending effect, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuation display time (the stop symbol of the normal symbol is derived) Specific display control during the remaining time until display). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode (a mode for each predetermined time) constituting a variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set to a time during which an effect in the variation mode or the effect mode is performed. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and executes control for displaying the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, or for performing the display effect. .

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the usual variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8001). If set, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S8002).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the ordinary symbol variation pattern command from the ordinary symbol variation pattern command storage area (step S8051).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8052). In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the short time state and the chance time flag is set (see steps S654 and S655), the chance time effect different from the normal state (for example, ally and enemy characters) Is produced). If the chance time flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table for executing the effect according to the chance time (step S8053).

  If the chance time flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect symbol determination processing for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the data indicating the common symbol variation pattern command read in step S8051 (step S8054). ). In the effect design determination process, when the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern command is a normal symbol variation pattern dedicated to a long universal symbol (see FIG. 31), the left, middle and right effect symbols are the same symbol (for example, “7”). The symbols in a state of being aligned (winning symbols) are determined as stop symbols for the effect symbols. In addition, when the contents of the regular pattern variation pattern command is a regular pattern variation pattern dedicated to the regular pattern losing or the short regular pattern, the symbols in the state where the left, middle and right production symbols are not aligned in the same symbol (out-of-line symbol) Is determined as the stop symbol of the production symbol. Here, the off-design symbol is a symbol (for example, “358” or the like) in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are not aligned with the same symbol. In addition, although the left and right effect symbols are aligned in the same symbol (although it is reach), the state where only the effect symbol in the middle is not aligned is also an outlier symbol. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the off symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the effect symbol not only in the case of the usual figure loss but also in the case of the short ordinary figure.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol in the effect symbol determination process based on the transmitted variation pattern command, but the game control microcomputer 560 stops the effect symbol. A display result designation command for designating a symbol may be transmitted, and the effect control CPU 101 may be configured to determine a stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the transmitted display result designation command.

  Then, a process table corresponding to the data read in step S8051 (that is, a process table corresponding to the normal fluctuation pattern) is selected (step S8055). Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8056).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 sets the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1) on condition that the abnormality notification flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification is being performed is not set. In accordance with the sound number data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps (light emitter) as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step S8057, S8058). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the usual pattern variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that effect symbols are variably displayed in accordance with the variation pattern corresponding to the ordinary diagram variation pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the diagram variation pattern command.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (steps S8057 and S8059). In other words, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the production symbol is started, a sound production according to the variable display is not executed, but an abnormal prize is notified. The corresponding sound output is continued.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S8059, the CPU 101 for effect control does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time (notification of abnormal winning is made) on the effect display device 9 and the display effect image of the variable display of the effect symbol are displayed on the effect display device 9 at the same time. . That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the effect symbol is started, not only the display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but an abnormal winning notification is made. The notification according to is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the usual variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S8060). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal variation pattern command reception flag (step S8061), and updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing (step S802) (step S8062). .

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, on the condition that the abnormality notification flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). , S8106).

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step) S8105, S8107). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, a sound production according to the variable display of the production symbol is not executed, but the sound output according to the abnormality winning notification is continued.

  In addition, when the processing of step S8107 is performed, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not to execute super reach (super reach A or super reach B) during the change of the effect design (step S8108). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern indicated in the usual variation pattern command read in step S8051 is a variation pattern including super reach. If the variation pattern includes super reach, the effect control CPU 101 executes decoration member control for moving the decoration member 78 (step S8109).

  By executing the processes of steps S8108 and S8109, when the variation pattern includes super reach, control for moving the decorative member 78 is started almost simultaneously with the start of variation of the effect symbol. Therefore, by moving the decorative member 78, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the player of the super reach. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the decorative member 78 moves in a manner that crosses the front side of the effect display device 9. Therefore, a more effective notice effect can be performed by performing a predetermined display effect on the effect display device 9 in conjunction with the movement of the decorative member 78. For example, a notice effect may be displayed by causing the effect display device 9 to display such a display that the sword is emitting light in conjunction with the movement of the decorative member 78 imitating a sword.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not to execute reach (normal reach, super reach A or super reach B) during the change of the effect design (step S8110). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern indicated in the ordinary variation pattern command read in step S8051 is a variation pattern including reach. If the variation pattern includes reach, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a predetermined reach effect start time (for example, 10 seconds after the start of variation) has elapsed based on the value of the variation time timer (step). S8111). If the predetermined reach production start time has elapsed, the production control CPU 101 executes decoration member control for moving the decoration member 78 (step S8112).

  When the process of steps S8108 to S8112 is executed and the variation pattern includes reach, control for moving the decorative member 78 is started when a predetermined reach effect start time is reached. Therefore, by moving the decorative member 78, it is possible to perform a reach effect in conjunction with the movement of the decorative member 78. A more effective reach effect can be performed by performing a predetermined display effect on the effect display device 9 in conjunction with the movement of the decorative member 78. For example, a display that the sword is emitting light in conjunction with the movement of the decorative member 78 imitating a sword may be displayed on the effect display device 9 to perform a reach effect.

  When the variation pattern includes super reach, after the announcement effect for moving the decorative member 78 is performed at the start of variation of the production symbol, the reach effect linked to the movement of the decoration member 78 is further performed. Become. The time during which the decorative member 78 is moved to the lowest position is short (for example, 1 second), and then the decorative member 78 is immediately set in a short time (for example, 1 second) in a decorative member initial position control process (see step S708) described later. Return to the initial position. Therefore, after the notice effect is executed, the decorative member 78 is returned to the initial position before the movement until the reach effect is started.

  Further, in steps S8109 and S8112, only the decorative member 78 is moved in the same manner as in FIGS. 7 and 8 from the horizontal state above the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the state inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left. By performing the movable control, a movable effect similar to the small hit gaming state is performed. It should be noted that, similarly to the small hit game state, the movable member 77 may be controlled to move on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and a movable effect in the same manner as the small hit game state may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the effect of moving the decoration member 78 during the reach announcement effect and the reach announcement effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to these cases. An effect of moving the member 78 may be executed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8113), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8115). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the universal symbol confirmation command reception flag indicating that the normal symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S8114), the process proceeds to step S8115. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, when the normal symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation.For example, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards Even when a regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing decorative member control. In the decorative member control, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the decorative member 78 is operating (decorating member is operating) (whether the decorative member operating flag is set) (step S1221). If it is not in operation, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the decoration member operated flag indicating that the decoration member 78 has already been moved is set (step S1222). If the decoration member operated flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 drives the decoration member drive motor 78B to start the movement of the decoration member 78 (step S1223). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the decorative member 78 is movable so as to be inclined obliquely from the upper right in the accessory 20 to the lower left in the accessory 20. To do. In step S1223, the production control CPU 101 drives the sword drive motor 79 and opens the decorative member 78 (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sword is divided into two in the longitudinal direction). Open). In addition, a decorative member operating flag indicating that the decorative member is operating is set (step S1224).

  When the decorative member is operating (Y in step S1221), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an ON signal from the lower position sensor 91b is detected (step S1225). When the ON signal from the lower position sensor 91b is detected, the effect control CPU 101 stops the driving of the decoration member drive motor 78B and stops the movement of the decoration member 78 (step S1226). Further, the decorative member operating flag is reset (step S1227), and the decorative member operated flag is set (step S1228). Then, a decoration member initial position setting request flag for requesting that the decoration member 78 be returned to the initial position is set (step S1229).

  In this embodiment, when the left end portion of the decorative member 78 moves to the lowest position and stops moving in step S1226, the decorative member initial position setting request flag is set in step S1229. Thus, the process of immediately returning the decorative member 78 to the initial position is executed in the decorative member initial position control process of step S708.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the decorative member initial position control process in step S708. In the decorative member initial position control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the decorative member initial position setting flag is set (step S2241). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2247. If not set, it is confirmed whether or not the decorative member initial position setting request flag is set (step S2242). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If it is set, the decorative member initial position setting request flag is reset (step S2243). Next, the effect control CPU 101 drives the decorative member drive motor 78B to start moving the decorative member 78 (step S2245). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 drives the decoration member drive motor 78B in the direction opposite to the decoration member control executed in the effect symbol variation processing. Accordingly, the decorative member 78 is movable so as to return to a horizontal state above the interior of the accessory 20 again from a state in which it is inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left in the accessory 20. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the sword drive motor 79 to be driven in the opposite direction to the decoration member control executed in the effect symbol changing process, so that the decoration member 78 returns to the closed state again. If the decoration member drive motor 78B is already being driven, the effect control CPU 101 continues the drive. Further, the decorative member initial position setting flag is set (step S2246).

  Then, when the upper position sensor 91a is turned on (a detection signal is output from the upper position sensor 91a), the driving of the decoration member drive motor 78B is stopped in order to stop the movement of the decoration member 78 (steps S2247 and S2248). . Further, the decorative member initial position setting flag is reset (step S2249).

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the universal symbol confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8151). If the common figure confirmation command reception flag is set (Y in step S8151), the common figure confirmation command reception flag is reset (step S8152). If the chance time flag is not set (N in step S8153), control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined and stored in the effect symbol determination process (step S8054) (step S8154).

  In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the normal symbol confirmation designation command (production symbol stop designation command) from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and control for stopping and displaying the effect symbol may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a long common map (step S8155). Whether or not it is per long long map is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the normal pattern variation pattern command read out in step S8051 is a variation pattern command dedicated to long per map (see FIG. 31). I can confirm.

  If it is a long hit (Y of step S8155), the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8156). In this embodiment, in the case of the long regular game, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 provided on the left side of the game area is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 5.0 seconds). In addition, a left navigation effect for guiding the player to launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area is performed on the effect display device 9 (for example, a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed). If the chance time flag is set, a process table corresponding to the chance time effect and the left navigation effect is selected (step S8157). If the chance time flag is not set, a process table for executing only the left navigation effect is selected (step S8158).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer and also starts a hit display period measurement timer for measuring a display period per common figure (step S8159). In the hit display period measurement timer, the time during which the normal symbol display unit 10 displays the hit symbol at the time of hitting the long normal symbol, and the time at which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be open at the time of hitting the long normal symbol. A time that is the same as or slightly longer than (for example, 5.0 seconds) is set.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S8060). For example, when the game state is a normal state, a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. I do. Further, when the game state is the short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 and the ally and the enemy character battle. Produce an aspect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal figure display process (step S804) (step S8161).

  If it is not the long usual figure (N in step S8155), that is, if the usual figure is lost or the short usual figure, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the chance time flag is set ( Step S8162). If the chance time flag is set, a process table corresponding to the chance time effect and displaying the usual loss is selected (step S8163). If the chance time flag is not set, the process table for executing only the display of the usual loss is selected (step S8164).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer and starts a loss display period measurement timer for measuring a normal loss display period (step S8165). In addition, the loss display period measurement timer includes a time when the normal symbol display symbol 10 is displayed on the normal symbol display 10 (the time when the symbol corresponding to the short normal symbol is displayed, the normal variable winning ball at the time of the short normal symbol). A time that is the same as or slightly longer than the time for which the device 61 is controlled to be opened (for example, approximately equal to the time obtained by adding 0.1 second) is set.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component are controlled (step S8166). For example, when the gaming state is a normal state, the effect display device 9 performs display for stopping and displaying the off-design symbol for a predetermined time. In addition, when the gaming state is the short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), the effect display device 9 causes the effect symbols to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time, and the teammate and the enemy character battle. Produce.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal-use loss display process (step S805) (step S8167).

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the normal figure display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the normal map display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8201). If not set, 1 is subtracted from the hit display period measurement timer (step S8202), and it is confirmed whether or not the hit display period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S8203). If not timed out, the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S8204), and the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data n (step S8205). For example, a left navigation effect in which a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 is executed. In the time-short state (that is, during the chance mode period), an effect is produced in which an ally and an enemy character battle.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S8206), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S8207). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S8208).

  If the special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (Y in step S8201), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect start process (step S806). (Step S8209). That is, the special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set when the game ball has started and won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 and received the special figure variation pattern command. In this case, since the special symbol variation display is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side, control is performed so as to shift to the special symbol correspondence processing corresponding to the special symbol variation display.

  When the winning display period measuring timer times out (Y in step S8203), the game ball is started and won in the normal variable winning ball device 61 even though the normal variable winning ball device 61 is opened due to the long normal game. It is a case where it did not do (namely, it loses). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8210). If the chance time flag is set, a process table corresponding to the chance time effect and displaying the loss is selected (step S8211). If the chance time flag is not set, the process table for executing only the display of the loss is selected (step S8212).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer and starts a special figure loss display period measurement timer for measuring the special figure loss display period (step S8213).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as an effect part is executed (step S8214). For example, when the gaming state is a normal state, the left navigation effect that displays a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is ended, and the effect of the thief character escaping on the effect display device 9 I do. If the gaming state is a short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), the left navigation effect for displaying a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is terminated, and the effect display device 9 Although the battle with the enemy character is performed, an effect is produced in which the battle is not settled.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure loss display process (step S811) (step S8215).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose loss display process (step S805) in the effect control process. In the general map loss display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8251). If it is not set, the loss display period measurement timer is decremented by 1 (step S8252), and it is confirmed whether the lost display period measurement timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S8253). If not timed out, the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S8254), and the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data n (step S8255). For example, the effect display device 9 performs an effect of stopping and displaying the outlier symbols in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are not aligned with the same symbol. In the short-time state (that is, during the chance mode), an effect in which the teammate and the enemy character are in battle but cannot be settled is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S8256), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S8257). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S8258).

  If the special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (Y in step S8251), it is very rare, but for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is released per short normal figure. , When the game ball starts to win the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 and a special figure variation pattern command is received. In this case, since the special symbol variation display is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side, the effect control CPU 101 sets a short start winning flag indicating that it is a start winning at the time of hitting the short normal figure (step S8259). ). The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect start process (step S806) (step S8260). That is, in this case, since the special symbol variation display is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side, control is performed so as to shift to the special symbol corresponding processing corresponding to the special symbol variation display.

  In addition, when the special figure variation pattern command is received despite the fact that the figure is lost, it means that an abnormal winning to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 has occurred. In this case, based on the reception of the start prize abnormality notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, abnormality notification is executed in the notification control process described later. The effect control CPU 101 may not execute the processes of steps S8259 and S8260 when the abnormality notification flag set in the notification control process described later is confirmed.

  When the loss display period measurement timer times out (Y in step S8253), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S800). S8261).

  FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing special figure corresponding effect start processing (step S806) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure corresponding effect start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern command from the special figure fluctuation pattern command storage area (step S8301).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8302). If the chance time flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table for executing the effect according to the chance time (step S8303).

  If the chance time flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the short start winning flag is set (step S8304). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table for executing the production corresponding to the short map according to the special figure fluctuation pattern (step S8305). If not set, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the long map according to the special figure variation pattern (step S8306). Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8307).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 sets the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1) on condition that the abnormality notification flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification is being performed is not set. In accordance with the sound number data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps (light emitter) as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step S8308, S8309). For example, in the case of a small hit after hitting a long regular game, a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 so as to aim for the winning of the game ball to the accessory 20. The display prompts to fire. Also, for example, when a big hit (so-called direct big hit) is made after hitting a long map, an effect of a mode in which a thief character escapes is started. In addition, for example, when a small hit or a big hit after hitting a short regular map, a character string such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and a fireworks display is performed and a chance has come. After performing a dramatic production, the program proceeds to a production similar to that after the long regular map. In the short-time state (that is, during the chance mode), a character string such as “Aim for the top!” Is displayed, and an effect is produced in which the ally and the enemy character battle.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (steps S8308 and S8310). In other words, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the production symbol is started, a sound production according to the variable display is not executed, but an abnormal prize is notified. The corresponding sound output is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the special figure fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation time timer (step S8311). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the special figure variation pattern command reception flag (step S8312), and updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect processing (step S807) (step S8313). ).

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special figure corresponding effect processing (step S807) in the effect control process. In the special figure corresponding effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8351) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step S8352). When the process timer times out (step S8353), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8354). Further, on the condition that the abnormality notification flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step S8355). , S8356). For example, in the case of a small hit after hitting a long regular game, a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 so as to aim for the winning of the game ball to the accessory 20. The display prompts to fire. Further, for example, when a big hit (so-called direct big hit) occurs after hitting a long normal, after the thief character has escaped, an effect is given as if the thief fell and recovered the stolen money. In addition, for example, when a small hit or a big hit after hitting a short regular map, a character string such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and a fireworks display is performed and a chance has come. After performing a dramatic production, the program proceeds to a production similar to that after the long regular map. In the short-time state (that is, during the chance mode), a character string such as “Aim for the top!” Is displayed, and an effect is produced in which the ally and the enemy character battle.

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, control of the rendering device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step) S8355, S8357). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, a sound production according to the variable display of the production symbol is not executed, but the sound output according to the abnormality winning notification is continued.

  If the variable time timer has timed out (step S8358), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect stop process (step S808) (step S8360). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the special symbol confirmation command reception flag indicating that the special symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step S8359), the process proceeds to step S8360. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the special symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation.For example, a special figure fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards or the like Even when the normal variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol variation ends), the special figure corresponding effect can be terminated.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing special figure corresponding effect stop processing (step S808) in the effect control process. In the special figure corresponding effect stop process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special figure confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8401). If the special figure confirmation command reception flag is set (Y in step S8401), the special figure confirmation command reception flag is reset (step S8402).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a big hit (so-called special figure direct big hit) (step S8403). Whether or not it is a big hit can be confirmed, for example, by determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern command read in step S8301 is a big hit exclusive fluctuation pattern command (see FIG. 29).

  If it is a big win (Y in step S8403), the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8404. If the chance time flag is set, it corresponds to the chance time effect. The process table for executing the effect for informing the special figure direct hit is selected (step S8405) If the chance time flag is not set, the process table for executing only the effect for informing the special figure direct hit Is selected (step S8406).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer and starts a jackpot display period measurement timer for measuring the jackpot display period (step S8407). The jackpot display period measurement timer is set to a time substantially the same as the time for displaying the jackpot symbol on the special symbol display 8.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component are controlled (step S8408). For example, when the game state is a normal state, the effect display device 9 performs an effect of displaying a character string such as “Big hit!”. If the gaming state is a short-time state (that is, during the chance mode period), an effect display device 9 performs an effect as if a friendly character wins an enemy character in a battle, and then “Battle Victory! An effect of displaying a character string such as “big hit” is performed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure jackpot display process (step S810) (step S8409).

  If it is not a big hit (N in step S8403), that is, if it is a small hit, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8410). If the chance time flag is set, the process table corresponding to the effect during the chance time and the effect during the small hit game is selected (step S8411). If the chance time flag is not set, the process table corresponding only to the small hit game effect is selected (step S8412).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer and also starts a time measurement timer after the small hit start for measuring the time after the start of the small hit game (step S8413).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component are controlled (step S8414). For example, when the game state is the normal state, a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 and the game ball is fired aiming for the winning of the game ball to the accessory 20. Produce a prompt. When the game state is a short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), a character string such as “Aim for the top!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a friend and an enemy character battle. Produce an aspect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit game processing (step S809) (step S8415).

  96 and 97 are flowcharts showing the small hit game in-process (step S809) in the effect control process. In the small hit game processing, the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit end designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (step S8451). The process moves to step S8467. If the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set, the process timer value is decremented by 1 (step S8452). If the process timer has not timed out (N in step S8453), the process proceeds to step S8458. When the process timer times out (Y in step S8453), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8454). Further, on the condition that the abnormality informing flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step S8455). , S8456). For example, when the game state is the normal state, a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 and the game ball is fired aiming for the winning of the game ball to the accessory 20. Produce a prompt. When the game state is a short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), a character string such as “Aim for the top!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a friend and an enemy character battle. Produce an aspect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8458.

  In addition, when the process of step S8456 is executed at the timing of the timer interruption after the process table corresponding to the normal route effect is selected in step S8462 described later, the effect display device 9 is in the normal route winning (role An effect corresponding to the winning of a game ball to the first entrance 71 of the object 20 is executed. For example, an effect in which the female character follows the thief is executed. In addition, when the process of step S8456 is executed at the timing of the timer interruption after the process table corresponding to the special route effect is selected in step S8464 described later, the effect display device 9 performs the special route winning (role An effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second entrance 72 of the object 20 is executed. For example, an effect in which the robot character follows the thief in place of the female character is executed.

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step) S8455, S8457). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production corresponding to the small winning game is not executed, but the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification is continued. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8458.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a predetermined movable time of the decorative member 78 (for example, 13 seconds after the start of the small hit game) has elapsed based on the value of the time measurement timer after the small hit start (step 13). S8458). If the movable time of the decorative member 78 has elapsed, the movable member control for moving the decorative member 78 is executed (step S8459).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the accessory 20 is released and the game is shifted to the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) moves the predetermined movable member 77. When the time has elapsed, the movable member 77 is moved (see steps S456I and S456J). In this embodiment, when 13 seconds have elapsed after the small hit game is started (after the accessory 20 is released), the movable member 77 is moved by the CPU 56 and the effect member 78 is moved by the effect control CPU 101 at the same timing. It is moved (see steps S8458 and S8459). Specifically, in the form shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the decorative member 78 is interlocked with the front surface side of the movable member 77, and the movable member 77 moves in an obliquely inclined state from the upper right to the lower left.

  In this embodiment, a case where the decoration member 78 is moved once in conjunction with the movement of the movable member 77 in the small hit game is shown. However, the effect control CPU 101 has a decoration member 78 in the small hit game. May be controlled to move a plurality of times. For example, the effect control CPU 101 moves the decoration member 78 at a timing linked to the movement of the movable member 77 by the game control microcomputer 560, and then moves the decoration member 78 to another one regardless of the movement of the movable member 77. (In this case, the movable member 77 is not moved and only the decorative member 78 is moved). By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect using the decoration member 78 during the small hit game.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8460). If the chance time flag is set, the process ends. If the chance time flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the first character winning designation command has been received (step S8461). If the first prize winning designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the normal route effect performed when the game ball enters the first entrance 71 of the accessory 20. (Step S8462). Then, control goes to a step S8466.

  If the first prize winning designation command has not been received (N in step S8461), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second prize winning designation command has been received (step S8463). If the second prize winning designation command has not been received, the processing is terminated as it is. If the second prize winning designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the special route effect performed when the game ball enters the second entrance 72 of the accessory 20. (Step S8464). Further, a special flag indicating that a special route effect is performed is set (step S8465). Then, control goes to a step S8466.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8466), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, execution of control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps (light emitting bodies) as the effect part, and the speaker 27 as the effect part) is started (step S8467). For example, when the process table corresponding to the normal route effect is selected in step S8462, the effect corresponding to the normal route winning is started in the effect display device 9 in step S8467. For example, an effect of a mode in which a female character follows a thief is started. For example, when a process table corresponding to the special route effect is selected in step S8464, an effect corresponding to the special route winning is started in the effect display device 9 in step S8467. For example, an effect in which the robot character follows the thief in place of the female character is started.

  When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (Y in step S8451), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the V winning designation command is received (step S8467). If received, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8468). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for V winning jackpot effect in the chance time effect period (step S8469).

  If the chance time flag is not set (N in step S8468), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special flag is set (step S8470). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for effect V winning jackpot effect at the time of special route winning (step S8471). If not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for effect V winning jackpot effect at the time of normal route winning (step S8472).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8473), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, execution of control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps (light emitter) as the effect part, and the speaker 27 as the effect part) is started (step S8474). For example, if the process data for the V winning jackpot effect in the chance time effect period is selected in step S8469, after the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle on the effect display device 9, “Battle victory! An effect of displaying a character string such as “” is started. Further, for example, when the process data for the V winning jackpot effect at the time of special route winning is selected in step S8471, the robot character catches the thief and then displays a character string such as “big hit!”. Is started. Also, for example, when the process data for the V winning jackpot effect at the time of winning the normal route is selected in step S8472, an effect of displaying a character string such as “hit!” After the female character catches the thief. Be started.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure jackpot display process (step S810) (step S8475).

  If the V winning designation command has not been received (N in step S8467), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8476). If set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the short time end designation reception flag is set (that is, whether or not a short time end designation command has been received) (step S8477). If the short time end designation reception flag is set (that is, at the end of the short time state), the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for special figure loss effect at the end of the chance time (step S8478). . Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the chance time flag and resets the time-short end designation reception flag (step S8479). If the short time end designation reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for special figure loss effect in the chance time effect period (step S8480). Then, control goes to a step S8484.

  If the chance time flag is not set (N in step S8476), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special flag is set (step S8481). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for special figure loss effect at the time of winning a special route (step S8482). If not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for special figure loss effect at the time of winning the normal route (step S8483). Then, control goes to a step S8484.

  In step S8484, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table and starts a special figure loss display period measurement timer for measuring a special figure loss display period. Further, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, as the effect component). The execution of the control of the various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component is started (step S8485). For example, if process data for special figure loss production at the end of the chance time is selected in step S8478, after the teammate character loses to the enemy character in the production display device 9, the “chance time ends!” An effect of displaying a character string such as is started. If process data for special figure losing production in the chance time production period is selected in step S8480, production of an aspect in which the ally character loses to the enemy character in battle is started on the production display device 9. Also, for example, when process data for special figure loss production at the time of winning a special route is selected in step S8482, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Sorry!” After the robot character has missed the thief. Is started. Further, for example, when process data for special figure loss production at the time of winning a normal route is selected in step S8483, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Sorry!” After the female character has escaped the thief. Be started.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure loss display process (step S811) (step S8486).

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the special figure jackpot display process (step S810) in the effect control process. In the special figure jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set (step S8501). If not set, the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S8502), and the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data n (step S8503). For example, in the chance time effect period, the effect display device 9 performs an effect of displaying a character string such as “Battle Victory! Further, for example, when an effect at the time of winning a special route is executed, after the robot character catches the thief, an effect of displaying a character string such as “big hit!” Is executed. Further, for example, when an effect at the time of winning a normal route is executed, after the female character catches the thief, an effect of displaying a character string such as “big hit!” Is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S8504), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S8505). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S8506).

  If the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set (Y in step S8501), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the jackpot game (step S8507). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S8508), and at the same time produces the production device (production component for production) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as the above, various lamps (light emitters) as the effect parts, and the speaker 27 as the effect parts (step S8509). For example, an effect during a big hit game is executed, such as displaying a character string such as “big hit!” On the effect display device 9 or displaying the number of rounds.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S812) (step S8510).

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing special figure loss display processing (step S811) in the effect control process. In the special figure losing display process, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the special figure losing display period measurement timer by 1 (step S8551), and checks whether the special figure losing display period measurement timer after the subtraction has timed out. (Step S8552). If not timed out, the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S8553), and the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data n (step S8554). For example, when the chance time is over, the effect display device 9 performs an effect in which a character string such as “End of Chance Time!” Is displayed after the ally character loses to the enemy character in the battle. . For example, when it is a chance time effect period, the effect display device 9 performs an effect in which the ally character loses to the enemy character in a battle. Also, for example, when an effect at the time of winning a special route is executed, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Sorry!” Is executed after the robot character misses the thief. Further, for example, when the effect at the time of winning the normal route is executed, after the female character has missed the thief, the effect of displaying a character string such as “Sorry!” Is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S8555), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S8556). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S8557).

  If the special figure losing display period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S8552), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the common figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8555). If not set, the process moves to step S8565.

  If the usual pattern variation pattern command reception flag is set (Y in step S8558), that is, if the variation of the normal symbol is being displayed at the end of the rendering corresponding to the special figure losing, the rendering control CPU 101 It is confirmed whether or not it is per long map (step S8559). Whether or not it is per long long map is, for example, whether or not the normal pattern variation pattern command stored in the normal pattern variation pattern command storage area is a dedicated variation pattern command per long long map (see FIG. 31). This can be confirmed by determining whether or not.

  In this embodiment, when the variation of the normal symbol is being displayed at the end of the effect corresponding to the special figure losing, the remaining time of the variation display of the normal symbol being executed at the end of the effect corresponding to the special figure losing ( A predetermined special effect is executed during the remaining time until the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. In the case of the long regular symbol hit (Y in step S8559), the effect control CPU 101 executes the special effect for the long regular symbol corresponding to the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently being executed. Process data is selected (step S8560). Then, control goes to a step S8562. Note that the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently being executed is set by the command analysis process from the fluctuation time specified by the common figure fluctuation pattern command stored in the common figure fluctuation pattern command storage area, for example. It can be specified by subtracting the measurement time of the time measurement timer (see step S616) after reception of the universal pattern command.

  Also. In this embodiment, as the process data for executing the special effect for the long regular figure, the process data corresponding to the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is less than 5 seconds, and the remaining time is 5 seconds or more and 20 seconds. There are four types of process data: process data corresponding to less than, process data corresponding to a remaining time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds, and process data corresponding to a remaining time of 30 seconds or more. In step S8560, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of these four types of process data according to the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently being executed.

  If it is not per long ordinary figure (N in step S8559), that is, if per ordinary figure loss or short ordinary figure, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently being executed. Process data for executing the corresponding special effect for the usual figure loss is selected (step S8561). Then, control goes to a step S8562. That is, in this embodiment, a common special effect is executed in the case of the usual figure loss and the case of the short common figure.

  Also. In this embodiment, as process data for executing special effects for ordinary figure losing, process data corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol variation display is less than 3 seconds, and the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds. There are four types of process data: process data corresponding to the above, process data corresponding to a remaining time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds, and process data corresponding to a remaining time of 30 seconds or more. In step S8561, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of these four types of process data in accordance with the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently being executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol currently being executed in the special effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the special effect (step S8562). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S8563), and produces the production device (production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as the above, various lamps (light emitting bodies) as the effect parts, and the speaker 27 as the effect parts (step S8564).

  For example, when the process data for the remaining variation time of less than 5 seconds is selected in step S8560, in step S8564, the effect display device 9 “again!” Until the remaining variation time has elapsed. An effect of displaying a character string such as is started. If the process data for the remaining time of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds is selected in step S8560, in step S8564, only the left and right are displayed on the effect display device 9 until the remaining time of the fluctuation time elapses. After displaying the design pattern (so-called reach-out design) with the same design in place, the female character will perform magic and all the left middle right will be in the same design with the same design. To start. If the process data for the remaining variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds or the process data for 30 seconds or more is selected in step S8560, the time display bomb is displayed on the effect display device 9 in step S8564. The production starts such that the time bomb is successfully released until the remaining time of the fluctuation time elapses. In this case, for example, when the process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds is used, or when the process data for 30 seconds or more is used, the character lines to be displayed on the effect display device 9 may be displayed. Different.

  For example, when the process data for the remaining time of less than 3 seconds is selected in step S8561, in step S8564, only the left and right in the effect display device 9 have the same pattern until the remaining time of the changed time elapses. The production of stopping and displaying the production symbols (so-called reach-off symbols) in a uniform state is started. If the process data for the remaining variation time of 3 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds is selected in step S8561, in step S8564, the reach display device 9 performs reach variation until the remaining variation time has elapsed. After the performance, an effect of stopping and displaying an effect symbol (so-called reach-off symbol) in a state where only the left and right are aligned with the same symbol is started. Also, if process data for the remaining variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds or process data for 30 seconds or more is selected in step S8561, a time bomb is displayed on the effect display device 9 in step S8564. Then, until the remaining time of the fluctuation time elapses, the production starts such that the time bomb cannot be released and it explodes. In this case, for example, when the process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds is used, or when the process data for 30 seconds or more is used, the character lines to be displayed on the effect display device 9 may be displayed. Different.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special effect process (step S814) (step S8565).

  If the normal pattern change pattern command reception flag is not set (N in step S8558), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (for example, a short start winning flag or a special flag) (step S8566) and effects control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8567).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the big hit game processing (step S812) in the effect control process. In the big hit game processing, it is confirmed whether or not a big hit end designation command has been received (step S8601). If not received, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8602). If the process timer has not timed out (N in step S8603), the process ends. When the process timer times out (Y in step S8603), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8604). In addition, on the condition that the abnormality notification flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8605). , S8606). For example, an effect during a big hit game is executed, such as displaying a character string such as “big hit!” On the effect display device 9 or displaying the number of rounds.

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step) S8605, S8607). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production corresponding to the big winning game is not executed, but the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification is continued.

  When the big hit end designation command is received (Y in step S8601), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the big hit post-effect (ending effect) (step S8608). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process table 1 of the selected process table and starts a big hit effect period measuring timer for measuring the effect period of the big hit effect (step S8609). Further, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, as the effect component). The execution of the control of the various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component is started (step S8610). For example, an effect is displayed in which a predetermined character appears on the effect display device 9 and a character string such as “End of jackpot!” Is displayed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the after-hit effect process (step S813) (step S8611).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the big hit after-effect process (step S813) in the effect control process. In the after-hit effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the after-hit effect period measurement timer by 1 (step S8651), and checks whether the after-hit after-hit effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S8652). ). If not timed out, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step S8653). If the process timer has not timed out (N in step S8654), the process ends. When the process timer times out (Y in step S8654), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8655). Further, on the condition that the abnormality informing flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8656). , S8657). For example, in the effect display device 9, an effect is performed in which a predetermined character appears or a character string such as “End of jackpot!” Is displayed.

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step) S8656, S8658). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production according to the after-hit effect is not executed, but the sound output according to the abnormal winning notification is continued.

  If the post-hit effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S8652), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the normal variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8659). If not set, the process proceeds to step S8666.

  In this embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuation display is in progress at the end of the big hit effect, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuation display being executed at the end of the big hit effect (until the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed). For the remaining time). If the normal pattern variation pattern command reception flag is set (Y in step S8659), that is, if the normal symbol variation display is being performed at the end of the after-hit effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets the number of times of short-time continuation. Process data for executing a special effect corresponding to the corresponding chance time period is selected (step S8660). Note that the number of time reductions can be specified, for example, by confirming the time reduction number designation command (see step S655) stored in the time reduction number designation command storage area.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets a chance time flag (step S8661) and uses the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol currently being executed as a special production period measurement timer for measuring the production period of the special production. Set (step S8662). Note that the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently being executed is set by the command analysis process from the fluctuation time specified by the common figure fluctuation pattern command stored in the common figure fluctuation pattern command storage area, for example. It can be specified by subtracting the measurement time of the time measurement timer (see step S616) after reception of the universal pattern command.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S8663), and produces the production device (production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1)). The effect display device 9 is controlled, various lamps (light emitters) as effect parts, and the speaker 27 as effect parts are executed (step S8664). For example, after displaying a character string such as “Big jackpot end chance 2 times!” On the effect display device 9, an effect is started in which the teammate and the enemy character start a battle.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special effect process (step S814) (step S8665).

  If the usual variation pattern command reception flag is not set (N in step S8659), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (for example, a short start winning flag or a special flag) (step S8666). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8667).

  102 and 103 are flowcharts showing the special effect process (step S814) in the effect control process. In the special effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the special effect period measurement timer (step S8701). It is confirmed whether or not the special performance period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S8702). If not timed out, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step S8703). If the process timer has not timed out (N in step S8704), the process ends. When the process timer times out (Y in step S8704), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8705). Further, on the condition that the abnormality informing flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step S8706). , S8707).

  For example, when the process data for the remaining fluctuation time of less than 5 seconds is selected, the effect display device 9 displays “another one” until the remaining fluctuation time elapses. An effect of displaying a character string such as “Time!” Is executed. In addition, when process data for the remaining time of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds is selected, only the left and right of the effect display device 9 are in the same pattern until the remaining time of the fluctuation time has elapsed. After displaying the effect symbol (so-called reach off symbol), the female character applies magic, and the effect is performed such that all of the left middle, right, and right are aligned with the same symbol and the normal character is hit. When the process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds or the process data for the time of 30 seconds or more is selected, the time display bomb is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the remaining time of the variation time is displayed. Perform the production that succeeds in releasing the time bomb by the time. In this case, for example, when the process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds is used, or when the process data for 30 seconds or more is used, the character lines to be displayed on the effect display device 9 may be displayed. Different.

  On the other hand, in the case of normal map loss or short map, for example, if process data for the remaining time of less than 3 seconds is selected, the effect display is made until the remaining time of the changed time elapses. In the device 9, an effect of stopping and displaying an effect symbol (so-called reach-off symbol) in a state where only the left and right are aligned with the same symbol is executed. In addition, when process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 3 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds is selected, after the reach variation is performed in the effect display device 9 until the remaining time of the variation time elapses, only the left and right are displayed. An effect of stopping and displaying the effect symbols (so-called reach off symbols) in a state where the same symbols are arranged is executed. When the process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds or the process data for the time of 30 seconds or more is selected, the time display bomb is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the remaining time of the variation time is displayed. A performance that explodes without being able to release the time bomb by the time it passes is executed. In this case, for example, when the process data for the remaining time of the variation time of 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds is used, or when the process data for 30 seconds or more is used, the character lines to be displayed on the effect display device 9 may be displayed. Different.

  Further, when the process data corresponding to the chance time is selected, for example, a character string such as “two chances to end the big hit!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9, and then the ally and the enemy character start a battle. The effect of the aspect is executed.

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, control of the rendering device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step) S8706, S8708). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production according to the special prize is not executed, but the sound output according to the abnormality winning notification is continued.

  If the special effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S8702), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a long normal figure (step S8709). Note that whether or not it is per long long map is, for example, whether or not the normal pattern variation pattern command stored in the normal map variation pattern command storage area is a dedicated variation pattern command per long long map (see FIG. 31). It can be confirmed by judging.

  If it is a long regular hit (Y in step S8709), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the chance time flag is set (step S8710). If the chance time flag is set, the process table corresponding to the chance time effect and the left navigation effect is selected (step S8711). If the chance time flag is not set, a process table for executing only the left navigation effect is selected (step S8712).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer and also starts a hit display period measurement timer for measuring a display period per common figure (step S8713). In the hit display period measurement timer, the time during which the normal symbol display unit 10 displays the hit symbol at the time of hitting the long normal symbol, and the time at which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be open at the time of hitting the long normal symbol. A time that is the same as or slightly longer than (for example, 5.0 seconds) is set.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component are controlled (step S8714). For example, when the game state is a normal state, a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. I do. Further, when the game state is the short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 and the ally and the enemy character battle. Produce an aspect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal figure display process (step S804) (step S8715).

  If it is not the long usual figure (N in step S8709), that is, if the common figure is lost or the short usual figure, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the chance time flag is set ( Step S8716). If the chance time flag is set, a process table corresponding to the chance time effect and displaying the usual loss is selected (step S8717). If the chance time flag is not set, the process table for executing only the display of the usual-time loss is selected (step S8718).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer and starts a loss display period measurement timer for measuring a normal loss display period (step S8719). In addition, the loss display period measurement timer includes a time when the normal symbol display symbol 10 is displayed on the normal symbol display 10 (the time when the symbol corresponding to the short normal symbol is displayed, the normal variable winning ball at the time of the short normal symbol). A time that is the same as or slightly longer than the time for which the device 61 is controlled to be opened (for example, approximately equal to the time obtained by adding 0.1 second) is set.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, and the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps (light emitters) and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S8720). For example, when the gaming state is a normal state, the effect display device 9 performs display for stopping and displaying the off-design symbol for a predetermined time. In addition, when the gaming state is the short time state (that is, during the chance mode period), the effect display device 9 causes the effect symbols to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time, and the teammate and the enemy character battle. Produce.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal-use loss display process (step S805) (step S8721).

  104 and 105 are flowcharts showing the notification control process in step S707. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1001). The initial notification flag is set when a power-on designation designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S636 in FIG. 80). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1006. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in step S637 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). Then, when the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1003 and S1004).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 (step S1005). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  In step S1006, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1008. If the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1007), and the process proceeds to step S1012. That is, the fact that an abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is a case where an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has been detected. Executed.

  In step S1008, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a start prize abnormality notification designation command reception flag indicating that a start prize abnormality notice designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1020. If the start prize abnormality notification designation command reception flag is set, the start prize abnormality notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1009), and the value of the start prize abnormality notification reception counter is incremented by 1 (step S1010). The start prize abnormality notification reception counter is a counter for counting the number of times of reception of the start prize abnormality notification designation command.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the start prize abnormality notification reception counter is 1 (that is, whether or not the start prize abnormality notification designation command has been received only once) (step S1011). If the value of the start winning abnormality notification reception counter is 1, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 (step S1012). The speech synthesis IC 703 mounted on the speech output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the speech data ROM 704 and outputs a speech signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1019).

  If the value of the start prize abnormality notification reception counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the value of the start prize abnormality notification reception counter is 2 (that is, whether the start prize abnormality notification designation command has been received twice). (No) is confirmed (step S1013). If the value of the start winning abnormality notification reception counter is 2, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 (step S1014). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1015). Therefore, thereafter, lamp display and sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1019).

  If the value of the start prize abnormality notification reception counter is not 2 (that is, if the value of the start prize abnormality notification reception counter is 3 or more (if the start prize abnormality notification designation command is received three or more times)) The control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating a sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1016). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1017). Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs, to the effect display device 9, a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1018). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in response to the command. Therefore, after that, lamp display and sound output (output of the abnormal notification sound) according to the notification of the abnormal winning is performed, and the abnormality display screen is superimposed on the effect display device 9. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1019).

  By executing the above processing, the effect control CPU 101 executes the abnormal winning notification based on the reception of the start winning abnormality notification specifying command or the abnormal winning notification specifying command. In addition, when the start control abnormality notification designation command is further received after starting the abnormal prize notification based on the reception of the start prize abnormality notification designation command, the effect control CPU 101 receives the start prize abnormality notification designation command. The notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is switched according to the number of times. That is, in this embodiment, when the start prize abnormality notification designation command is received only once, the abnormal prize notification is executed using only the sound output. In addition, when the start winning abnormality notification designation command is received twice, the abnormal winning notification is executed using the lamp display in addition to the sound output. Further, when the start prize abnormality notification designation command is received three times or more, in addition to the lamp display and sound output, the abnormality prize notification is executed by superimposing the abnormality notification screen.

  It should be noted that the notification mode of the abnormal prize notification shown in this embodiment is merely an example, for example, by changing the abnormality notification sound to be output or changing the display pattern (for example, lighting or blinking) of the lamp. The notification mode of the winning notification may be switched. In this embodiment, the case where the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is switched according to the number of times of reception of the starting winning abnormality notification specifying command has been described. In addition, the abnormal winning notification may be performed using all of the abnormality notification screen display and lamp display. In this case, when the start control abnormality notification designation command is received once, the production control CPU 101 performs output control of the abnormality notification sound using the speaker 27 and also superimposes and displays the abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9. Display control of abnormal display using the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c is performed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output when the start winning abnormal notification specifying command is received only once is shown. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, when the start prize abnormality notification designation command is received only once, an abnormality notification screen may be superimposed on the effect display device 9, and display control of abnormality display using the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c is performed. May be. Further, the abnormality notification effect may be performed using any two or all of the abnormality notification screen superimposed display, sound output, or abnormality display using the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c.

  In step S1020, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an abnormality notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormality notification designation command other than the abnormal prize notification designation command and the start prize abnormality notification designation command has been received is set. . If set, the production control CPU 101 outputs to the audio output board 70 sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification in accordance with the type of abnormality (step S1021). Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs, to the lamp driver board 35, lamp control execution data indicating a lamp display corresponding to the abnormal winning notification in accordance with the type of abnormality (step S1022). Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs, in the effect display device 9, a command to superimpose an abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time in the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1023). . The VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in response to the command. Then, control goes to a step S1019.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of abnormality notified in the notification control process. The 12V short-circuit error is caused, for example, when an abnormal short-circuit state of a winning system switch such as the start port switch 60, the count switch 23, or each of the winning port switches 33a, 38a, 39a is detected due to an illegal act by radio waves. It is abnormal. In this case, the production control CPU 101 displays a character string such as “12V short-circuit error” on the production display device 9 based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command for designating the radio wave fraud, and the radio fraud notification sound. The power is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are blinked.

  The magnetic sensor sensing is an abnormality when, for example, the magnetic sensor arranged in the game area detects abnormal magnetism. In this case, the production control CPU 101 displays a character string such as “Abnormal magnetism detected” on the production display device 9 based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command for designating the magnetic abnormality and the radio wave. An unauthorized notification sound is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are blinked.

  The photo sensor error is an abnormality when the rotating body position sensor 87a detects an abnormality of the rotating body 86. For example, a photosensor error is determined when an ON signal cannot be detected from the rotating body position sensor 87a at a predetermined timing during the rotation control of the rotating body 86. In this case, the production control CPU 101 displays a character string such as “photo sensor error” on the production display device 9 based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command for designating the photo sensor error, and the radio fraud notification sound. Is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are blinked.

  The discharged ball error is an abnormality when there are more game balls discharged from the game 20 than the game balls won in the game 20. In this case, the production control CPU 101 causes the production display device 9 to display a character string such as “Check the inside of the accessory” based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command for designating the discharge ball error. The radio wave fraud notification sound is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are blinked.

  The illegal winning error is an abnormality when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening or the starting winning opening is detected. In this case, the production control CPU 101 displays a character string such as “There was an abnormal prize” on the production display device 9 based on the reception of the abnormal prize notification designation command or the start prize abnormality notice designation command. A radio wave fraud notification sound is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are blinked.

  At the time of winning the vibration error, there is an abnormality when a vibration sensor mounted on the gaming machine detects vibration when a game ball is present in the accessory 20. In this case, the production control CPU 101 displays a character string such as “Do not hit the table” on the production display device 9 based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command for designating the vibration error winning time, A warning sound is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are blinked.

  The residual ball error is an abnormality when it is detected that all the game balls won in the accessory 20 have not been discharged even after a predetermined period has elapsed after the accessory 20 is closed. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display a character string such as “Check the inside of the accessory” on the basis of the reception of the abnormality notification specifying command for specifying the residual sphere error. The warning sound is output from the speaker 27, and all the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c are turned on.

  The vibration error is normal when the vibration sensor mounted on the gaming machine detects vibration when the game ball is not present in the accessory 20. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 lights all the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command that designates the vibration error normal time.

  The full tank error is an abnormality when the surplus ball tray 4 (bottom plate) is full. In this case, the production control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound such as “the bottom plate is full, please remove the ball” based on the reception of the abnormality notification designation command for designating the full tank error.

  FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect on the effect display device 9 and the sound effect by the speaker 27. FIG. 107 (A) shows an example when the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of effect symbols. FIG. 107 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 107 (C) shows an example in which abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, and performs control to output an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. . Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Moreover, even if the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Since the production control CPU 101 does not execute control for deleting the abnormality notification screen and control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are performed. Continues until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, the production control CPU 101 controls to stop the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound are started. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27, but the abnormality notification may be performed using a lamp / LED. In that case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the effect control CPU 101 controls the lamp / LED to blink in a manner different from that in the normal state (when no abnormal winning has occurred).

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect an abnormal prize and does not detect an abnormal prize for a predetermined period after the power supply to the game machine is started (a period during which the initialization notification is executed). The abnormal winning notification designating command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 has a special symbol process flag value other than a predetermined value (8 in this embodiment) or a value other than the predetermined symbol process flag value (4 in this embodiment). When the abnormal winning prize is detected at all times, the production control CPU 101 receives the start winning abnormality notice designation command or the abnormal prize notice designation command within a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. May not be notified of abnormal winnings.

  Next, the winning and discharging timings of the game ball to and from the variable winning ball device (object) 20 and the movable timing of the movable member 77 will be described. 108 to 111 are explanatory views showing the timing of entering and discharging the game ball to and from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the movable timing of the movable member 77. Among these, FIG. 108 shows the timing of entering and discharging the game ball when the game ball does not enter either the first entrance 71 or the second entrance 72 during the opening period of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the movable The movable timing of the member is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 108, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) shifts to the small hit game, it drives the opening solenoid 75 to open the opening doors 76A and 76B (step S417, (See S32). In the example shown in FIG. 108, since the game ball has not entered either the first entrance 71 or the second entrance 72 after the opening doors 76A and 76B are opened, the first prize winning switch 71a and No ON signal of the second prize winning switch 72a is detected, and the value of the in-function game ball number counter remains zero. Therefore, when the processing time during release times out and the value of the winning monitoring timer becomes 0 (see steps S430 and S451), the movable member 77 is movable without opening both the first reservoir and the second reservoir. (See steps S453, S456A to S456J), and the small hit game is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 109 shows the entry and discharge timing of the game ball and the movable timing of the movable member when the game ball enters only the first entrance 71 during the opening period of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In the example shown in FIG. 109, when the CPU 56 shifts to the small hit game, the CPU 56 drives the opening solenoid 75 to open the opening doors 76A and 76B (see steps S417 and S32). In the example shown in FIG. 109, a game ball enters the first entrance 71 and is detected by the first prize winning switch 71a (see step S434A), and the CPU 56 adds 1 to the in-function game ball counter. (See S435A).

  Next, the game ball passes through the first path in the accessory 20 and passes through the path member 92 provided on the left side in the accessory 20 to the first reservoir as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10. Once stored. Next, when the processing time during release times out and the value of the winning monitoring timer becomes 0 (see steps S430 and S451), it is determined that the value of the in-function game ball number counter is not 0 (see step S453), and the CPU 56 Then, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined first storage part opening time (for example, 8 seconds after opening of the accessory 20 (after opening of the first accessory in the case of opening twice) has elapsed (see step S456B). ). If the predetermined first reservoir opening time has elapsed, the CPU 56 controls the first reservoir to the open state by driving the first reservoir solenoid 90a to move the first reservoir member 93a. (See step S456C). Then, as shown in FIG. 11, the game ball released from the first storage portion is guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 and wins the specific winning opening 66A through the specific side surface opening 66b, or other side surface. It enters the side opening 84 and is discharged.

  Next, when the ON signal of the accessory discharge switch 85a is detected (see step S437), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 to 0, and the small hit game ends. Note that the time from when the game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 is won or discharged to the specific winning opening 66A and is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a is, for example, 10 seconds. The opening time of the second reservoir is set to a time (for example, 12 seconds) that is sufficiently longer than the time (for example, 10 seconds) until the game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 is discharged. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 109, when the processing time during release times out and the value of the in-function game ball number counter becomes 0 (see Steps S430 and S453), the second reservoir is opened and the movable member 77 is movable. (See steps S453, S456E to S456J), and the small hit game is terminated as it is. In other words, if the game ball has not entered the second entrance 72 and is not detected by the second prize winning switch 72a, the movable member 77 is not moved during the small hit game.

  FIG. 110 shows the timing of entering and discharging the game ball and the timing of moving the movable member when the game ball enters only the second entrance 72 during the opening period of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In the example shown in FIG. 110, when the CPU 56 shifts to the small hit game, the CPU 56 drives the opening solenoid 75 to open the opening doors 76A and 76B (see steps S417 and S32). In the example shown in FIG. 110, a game ball enters the second entrance 72 and is detected by the second prize winning switch 72a (see step S434B), and the CPU 56 adds 1 to the in-function game ball counter. S435B reference).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the game ball is guided to the upper right in the accessory 20 through the second path in the accessory 20 and temporarily stored in the second storage part. . Next, when the processing time during release times out and the value of the winning monitoring timer becomes 0 (see steps S430 and S451), it is determined that the value of the in-function game ball number counter is not 0 (see step S453), and the CPU 56 Then, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined first storage part opening time (for example, 8 seconds after opening of the accessory 20 (after opening of the first accessory in the case of opening twice) has elapsed (see step S456B). ). If the predetermined first reservoir opening time has elapsed, the CPU 56 controls the first reservoir to the open state by driving the first reservoir solenoid 90a to move the first reservoir member 93a. (See step S456C). In the example shown in FIG. 110, since the game ball has not entered the first entrance 71, winning or discharging of the game ball to the specific winning port 66A does not occur even if the first storage part is opened.

  Next, even if a predetermined second storage section opening period (for example, 12 seconds after the opening of the accessory 20 (after the first opening of the accessory in the case of opening twice) 12 seconds) has passed, Since the value of is still 0 (in this example, 1) (see steps S453 and S456F), the CPU 56 drives the second storage portion solenoid 90b to move the second storage member 93b. The second reservoir is controlled to be open (see step S456G). Further, when the movable time of the predetermined movable member 77 (for example, 13 seconds after opening the accessory 20 (after opening the first accessory in the case of opening twice), the CPU 56 moves the movable member 77 to move. The member control is executed (see step S456J). Then, as shown in FIG. 13, while the 2nd storage part is open | released, the movable member 77 is moved and it changes to the state inclined diagonally from upper right to lower left. In this case, the decorative member 78 is also moved in conjunction with the movable member 77 in accordance with the control of the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101). Then, the game ball released from the second storage section falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 through the movable member 77 and the path member 95, and as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the specific opening 66 or the specific side surface opening. A specific winning opening 66A is won through 66b, or the other side opening 84 is discharged.

  As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 77 is moved to the lowest position, the ON signal from the lower position sensor 91b is detected and the movable member initial position setting request flag is set (see steps S225 and S229). ), The initial position control process is immediately executed to return the second reservoir to the closed state and to return the movable member 77 to the initial position (see steps S1242 to S1249).

  Next, when the ON signal of the accessory discharge switch 85a is detected (see step S437), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 to 0, and the small hit game ends. As shown in FIG. 110, in this embodiment, the movable member 77 is moved and the decorative member 78 is moved only when the game ball enters the second entrance 72 and is detected by the second prize winning switch 72a. An effect that moves in conjunction with is executed. Then, the game ball released from the second storage section falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 through the movable member 77 and the path member 95, and as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the specific opening 66 or the specific side surface opening. A specific winning opening 66A is won through 66b, or the other side opening 84 is discharged.

  Further, FIG. 111 shows the timing of entering and discharging the game ball when the game ball enters the first entrance 71 and the game ball enters the second entrance 72 during the open period of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the movable timing. The movable timing of the member is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 111, when the CPU 56 shifts to the small hit game, the CPU 56 drives the opening solenoid 75 to open the opening doors 76A and 76B (see steps S417 and S32). In the example shown in FIG. 111, a game ball enters the first entrance 71 and is detected by the first prize winning switch 71a (see step S434A), and the CPU 56 increments the in-function game ball number counter by 1 (step S434A). (See S435A). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 111, a game ball enters the second entrance 72 and is detected by the second prize winning switch 72a (see step S434B), and the CPU 56 adds 1 in-game game ball number counter. The count value is set to 2 (see step S435B).

  Next, the game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 passes through the first path in the accessory 20, and as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, a path member 92 provided on the left side in the accessory 20. And is temporarily stored in the first storage section. The game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 is guided to the upper right in the accessory 20 through the route member 94 via the second route in the accessory 20 as shown in FIG. 2 is temporarily stored in the storage unit.

  Next, when the processing time during release times out and the value of the winning monitoring timer becomes 0 (see steps S430 and S451), it is determined that the value of the in-function game ball number counter is not 0 (see step S453), and the CPU 56 Then, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined first storage part opening time (for example, 8 seconds after opening of the accessory 20 (after opening of the first accessory in the case of opening twice) has elapsed (see step S456B). ). If the predetermined first reservoir opening time has elapsed, the CPU 56 controls the first reservoir to the open state by driving the first reservoir solenoid 90a to move the first reservoir member 93a. (See step S456C). Then, as shown in FIG. 11, the game ball released from the first storage portion is guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 and wins the specific winning opening 66A through the specific side surface opening 66b, or other side surface. It enters the side opening 84 and is discharged. In the example shown in FIG. 111, it is assumed that the game ball released from the first storage part has entered the side surface opening 84 and has been displaced.

  Next, when the ON signal of the accessory discharge switch 85a is detected (see step S437), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 to 1 (see step S438). In this case, even if the game ball that has entered from the first entrance 71 is discharged, the value of the in-function game ball number counter does not become 0 (in the case where the specific winning slot 66A has not been won) (see step S453). When a predetermined second storage section opening period (for example, 12 seconds after opening of the accessory 20 (after the first opening of the accessory in the case of opening twice), the CPU 56 drives the second storage solenoid 90b. Then, by moving the second storage member 93b, the second storage unit is controlled to be in an open state (see step S456G). Further, when the movable time of the predetermined movable member 77 (for example, 13 seconds after opening the accessory 20 (after opening the first accessory in the case of opening twice), the CPU 56 moves the movable member 77 to move. The member control is executed (see step S456J). Then, as shown in FIG. 13, while the 2nd storage part is open | released, the movable member 77 is moved and it changes to the state inclined diagonally from upper right to lower left. In this case, the decorative member 78 is also moved in conjunction with the movable member 77 in accordance with the control of the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101). Then, the game ball released from the second storage section falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 through the movable member 77 and the path member 95, and as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the specific opening 66 or the specific side surface opening. A specific winning opening 66A is won through 66b, or the other side opening 84 is discharged.

  As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable member 77 is moved to the lowest position, the ON signal from the lower position sensor 91b is detected, and the movable member initial position setting request flag is set (see steps S225 and S229). ), The initial position control process is immediately executed to return the second reservoir to the closed state and to return the movable member 77 to the initial position (see steps S1242 to S1249).

  When the ON signal of the accessory discharge switch 85a is detected (see step S437), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 to 0, and the small hit game ends.

  Next, a display mode in the effect display device 9 will be described. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display area in the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 112, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first decorative symbol display area 9a for displaying the first decorative symbol in synchronization with the normal symbol variable display, and a special symbol variable display. The second decorative symbol display area 9b for performing the variable display of the second decorative symbol in synchronism with the effect, and the effect symbol display area 9c for performing the variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol are included. In the effect symbol display area 9c, in addition to the effect symbol variation display, the effect for the start winning when hitting the ordinary figure long or the ordinary symbol short, and the effect for the variation display result of the special symbol (for example, the special symbol) (Drawing big win symbol display), effect for opening of the accessory 20 at the time of small hit (for example, upward navigation effect), specific effect in the advantageous state (for example, effect of a mode in which the ally and enemy characters battle) Is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display process (see step S705A), the effect control CPU 101 performs the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display area 9a based on the reception of the common symbol variable pattern command. In this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control performs the variable display of the first decorative symbol by alternately blinking the circular region which is the first decorative symbol display region 9a in blue and white. And when the display result command which shows a usual figure loss is received, blue is lighted as a stop symbol based on reception of a normal symbol confirmation designation | designated command, or change time having passed. Further, when a display result command indicating a short regular symbol is received, yellow is turned on as a stop symbol based on the reception of the normal symbol confirmation designation command or the passage of the variation time. Further, when a display result command indicating a long normal symbol is received, red is turned on as a stop symbol based on the reception of the normal symbol confirmation designation command or the passage of the fluctuation time.

  In the second decorative symbol display process (see step S705B), the effect control CPU 101 performs variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol display area 9b based on the reception of the special symbol variable pattern command. In this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control performs the variable display of the second decorative symbol by alternately blinking the rectangular region which is the second decorative symbol display region 9b in blue and white. When a display result command indicating a small hit is received, blue is turned on as a stop symbol based on the reception of the special symbol confirmation designation command or the passage of the variation time. Also, when a display result command indicating a big hit is received, red is turned on as a stop symbol based on the reception of a special symbol confirmation designation command or the passage of a variation time.

  Next, an effect display mode executed in the effect display device 9 will be described. 113 to 120 are explanatory diagrams illustrating examples of display modes of effects executed in the effect display device. When the ordinary figure variation pattern command is received, as shown in FIG. 113 (1), the effect symbol variation display is started in the effect symbol display area 9c of the effect display device 9 (see steps S8001, S8002, and S8051 to S8062). . At the same time, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the first decorative symbol display area 9a (see step S805A). FIG. 113 shows an example in which the reach effect is executed during the change display of the effect symbol performed in synchronization with the change display of the normal symbol.

  When the reach effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), the left effect symbol is temporarily stopped. Next, when slip variation is specified by the received normal pattern variation pattern command, as shown in FIG. 113 (3), after temporarily stopping the right effect design with a design different from the left effect design As shown in FIG. 114 (4), the effect of slidingly displaying the right effect symbol temporarily stopped is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (17), a state in which the left and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol is displayed, and the process proceeds to reach effect.

  In addition, when the pseudo-variation once change is designated by the received normal figure change pattern command, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), after the left effect symbol is temporarily stopped, FIG. 113 (5). As shown in (6), the lost symbol is temporarily stopped as an effect symbol without reaching the reach mode in the middle right order. Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (7), the left, middle, and right effect symbols are changed again. Then, as shown in FIGS. 113 (8) and (17), the effect symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol in the left and right order, and the process shifts to the reach effect.

  In addition, when pseudo-continuous twice variation is specified in the received normal variation pattern command, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), after the left effect symbol is temporarily stopped, FIG. 113 (9). As shown in (10), the lost symbol is temporarily stopped as an effect symbol without becoming the reach mode in the middle right order. Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (11), the left, middle and right effect symbols are changed again. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (12), after the left effect symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 113 (13) and (14), as the effect symbol without becoming the reach mode in the middle right order. Lost symbols are temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (15), the left, middle, and right effect symbols are changed again. Then, as shown in FIGS. 113 (16) and (17), the effect symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol in the left and right order, and the process shifts to the reach effect.

  In addition, when a specific effect such as slippage fluctuation or pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not specified in the received normal pattern change pattern command, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), after the left effect design is temporarily stopped, As shown in FIG. 113 (17), the right effect design is temporarily stopped at the same design, and a shift to the reach effect is made.

  FIG. 114 shows an aspect of the reach effect that is performed during the change display of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, three types of reach effects may be executed: normal reach, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. When the effect of normal reach is executed, as shown in FIG. 114 (1), from the state in which the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in a state where the left and right are aligned with the same effect design is changed at a high speed, As shown in FIG. 3, the effect of stopping and displaying the final stop symbol is executed after the medium effect symbol is changed to the low speed fluctuation.

  When the effect of Super Reach A is executed, as shown in FIG. 114 (3), in a state where the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in a state where the left and right are aligned with the same effect symbol is changed at high speed, "Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (4), the effect of stopping and displaying the final stop symbol is executed after changing the effect symbol in the middle to the low speed fluctuation.

  When the effect of Super Reach B is executed, as shown in FIG. 114 (5), from the state in which the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in a state where the left and right are aligned with the same effect symbol is changed at a high speed, As shown in 6), the effect of stopping and displaying the final stop symbol is executed after the effect of rotating the front and back is performed while blinking the effect symbol in the middle.

  When the effect of Super Reach C is executed, as shown in FIG. 114 (7), from the state in which the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in a state where the left and right are aligned with the same effect symbol is changed at high speed from FIG. As shown to 8), the effect of the aspect which makes a female character appear is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 114 (8), a character string such as “reach” is displayed as a female character's speech, and a variation display of the effect pattern of the reach mode is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Then, after that, an effect of stopping and displaying the final stop symbol is executed.

  In the case of a long regular hit, after the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (1), the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are aligned with the same symbol (step S8154). reference). In this case, as shown in FIG. 115 (1), the first decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 9a, and the long winning symbol (red) is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (2), a character string such as “Aim at the left!” Is displayed, and a left navigation effect is started to urge the player to launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. (See steps S8158, S8160, and S8205). In this case, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be open for a predetermined period (for example, 5.0 seconds), so that the game ball can be won at the starting winning opening.

  Note that, in the case of the long normal map, there is a case where a normal pattern variation pattern command in which the revival effect is designated as the specific effect is received. In this case, when the reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 115 (3), after the effect that the last stop symbol is a losing symbol, as shown in FIG. A character is introduced, and a female character performs an effect of applying magic to the middle symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (5), the effect of the aspect that the left, middle, and right effect symbols are aligned with the same symbol is performed by the magic, and then the same manner as in FIGS. 115 (1) and (2). Produce.

  Next, when a game ball wins the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display is started, and in synchronization with this, the second ornament symbol variation display is executed in the second ornament symbol display area 9b (see step S705B). . When the change display of the special symbol is a small hit, the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state, and a character string such as “Aim for the top!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. An effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the upper side of the game area is started (see steps S8306, S8309, S8310, S8356, and S8357). Then, a small hit game is executed. After the normal symbol variation display is finished and the normal symbol display result display period is over, the next normal symbol variation display can be started even during special symbol variation display or small hit games. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 115 (6), the first decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display area 9a in synchronization with the next normal symbol variation display.

  115 (7), (8), and (9) when the game ball is not won while the normal variable winning ball device 61 is controlled to be in the open state (that is, when the game ball is lost). As shown in FIG. 5, after the display of the mode in which the thief successfully escapes, an effect is displayed in which a character string such as “Sorry!” Is displayed (see steps S8121, S8214, and S8255). Then, after that, when the next normal symbol variation display is already being executed, the process proceeds to the effect of FIG. 119 or 120 depending on whether or not it is a long ordinary symbol and the remaining variation display time. .

  Next, when a game ball is won at the first entrance 71 of the accessory 20 during the small hit game (when the normal route is won), as shown in FIGS. The effect of the chasing mode is executed (see steps S8462, S8467, S8456, S8457). Thereafter, when the game ball does not win the second entrance 72 and does not win the specific winning slot 66A (that is, in the case of losing, including the case where the game ball does not win the accessory 20). 115 (12), the effect at the time of winning the normal route is continued. As shown in FIGS. 115 (13) and (14), after the female character has escaped the thief, a character string such as “Sorry!” Is displayed (see steps S8483, S8485, and S8554). Then, after that, when the next normal symbol variation display is already being executed, the process proceeds to the effect of FIG. 119 or 120 depending on whether or not it is a long ordinary symbol and the remaining variation display time. . On the other hand, when the game ball wins the specific winning slot 66A without winning the second entrance 72 and becomes a V winning jackpot, as shown in FIG. 115 (15) (16), an effect is displayed in which a character string such as “big hit!” Is displayed after the female character catches the thief (see steps S8472, S8474, S8503). . After that, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  If a game ball wins the second entrance 72 of the accessory 20 during the small hit game (when winning a special route), the robot character replaces the female character with a thief as shown in FIG. 115 (17). The effect is switched to the effect of chasing (see steps S8464, S8467, S8456, S8457). Thereafter, when the game ball does not win the specific winning opening 66A (that is, in the case of losing, including the case where the game ball does not win the accessory 20), it is shown in FIG. 115 (18) (19). Thus, after the robot character has missed the thief, an effect is displayed in which a character string such as “Sorry!” Is displayed (see steps S8482, S8485, and S8554). Then, after that, when the next normal symbol variation display is already being executed, the process proceeds to the effect of FIG. 119 or 120 depending on whether or not it is a long ordinary symbol and the remaining variation display time. . On the other hand, when the game ball wins the specific winning opening 66A and wins the V winning big hit, as shown in FIGS. 115 (20) and (21), after the robot character catches the thief, “big hit!” Or the like. An effect in which a character string is displayed is executed (see steps S8471, S8474, and S8503). After that, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, although the probability is low, the special symbol variation display result may be a big hit (so-called direct big hit). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 115 (22), (23), and (24), the thief falls and recovers the stolen money item during the special symbol variation display as shown in FIGS. (See steps S8306, S8309, S8310, S8356, S8357). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 115 (22), (23), and (24), the second decorative symbol variation display is also executed in the second decorative symbol display area 9b in synchronization with the special symbol variation display ( (See step S705B). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (25), an effect is displayed in which a character string such as “big hit!” Is displayed (see steps S8406, S8408, and S8503). In this case, as shown in FIG. 115 (25), the big win symbol (red) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol display area 9b (see step S705B). After that, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  If it is not per long common figure (that is, if it is per common figure loss or short common figure), as shown in FIG. Is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (see step S8154). In the example shown in FIG. 116, the case of the short common symbol is shown, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as an effect symbol, and the short decorative symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display area 9a. The symbol (yellow) per figure is stopped and displayed (see step S705A). Even in the case of an ordinary figure loss, only the ordinary figure loss symbol (blue) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, and the display in the same manner as in FIG. 116 (1) is performed.

  In the case of a short normal, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be opened for an extremely short time (for example, 0.1 second). For this reason, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a start winning opening when it is per short circuit. However, in rare cases, a game ball may be awarded at the start winning opening when it is per short circuit. If the game ball is won at the start winning opening in the case of a short regular figure, as shown in FIG. 116 (2), a character string such as "Chance is!" Thereafter, the same effects as those shown in FIG. 115 (6) and thereafter are executed (see steps S8305, S8309, S8310, S8356, and S8357). Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to feel as if a chance has come suddenly despite the fact that the lost symbol of the effect symbol is displayed, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Note that, for example, when a winning at the start winning opening is detected in the case of an ordinary loss, it means that an abnormal winning at the starting winning opening has occurred. As described above, when an abnormal winning at the start winning opening is detected, as shown in FIG. 116 (3), a character string such as “There was an abnormal winning” is displayed, and the abnormal winning has occurred. Is notified (see step S1018).

  Further, in this embodiment, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, and when it is controlled to the short-time state, a transition is made to a chance time in which a special effect for causing a predetermined character to appear is executed. 117 and 118 show the display mode of the effect at the chance time. When the big hit game is ended, as shown in FIG. 117 (1), a character string such as “End of big hit” is displayed, and a character string such as “Two chances!” Is displayed according to the number of short-time continuations. (See steps S8660, S8664, S8707, S8708). In the example shown in FIG. 117 (1), the case where the number of short-time continuations is two is shown. However, “5 chances!”, “10 chances”, “chance 15” depending on the number of time continuations. A character string such as “times” is displayed. If the normal symbol variation display is already being executed, the effect of starting the battle between the ally and the enemy character is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (2) over the remaining variation time. (See steps S8707 and S8708). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 117 (1) and 117 (2), the first decorative symbol variation display is executed in the first decorative symbol display area 9a in synchronization with the normal symbol variation display already being executed. (See step S705A).

  When a long common figure is reached, as shown in FIG. 117 (3), a friend and an enemy character battle and a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed (see steps S8711, S8714, and S8205). In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (3), the symbol (yellow) per short common symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the first ornament symbol in the first ornament symbol display area 9a. In addition, in the case of a short normal figure or a common figure loss, the effect shown in FIG. 117 (2) is repeatedly executed.

  Next, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening and a small hit is obtained as a result of the change display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. Is displayed (see steps S8411, S8414, S8456, S8457).

  Next, when the game ball that has won the winning combination 20 wins the special winning slot 66A and becomes a V winning big hit, as shown in FIGS. An effect is displayed in which a character string such as “Battle Victory! Jackpot” is displayed when the character is won by battle (see steps S8469, S8474, and S8503). After that, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (8), when a game ball does not win the prize 20 or when a prize has not been won in the specific winning slot 66A even if the prize 20 is won (that is, lost), as shown in FIG. Transition to battle production with enemy characters. Next, in the case of a long common figure, as shown in FIG. 117 (9), a friend and an enemy character battle and a character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed (see steps S8711, S8714, and S8205). ). In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (9), the symbol (yellow) per short common symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the first ornament symbol in the first ornament symbol display area 9a. In addition, in the case of a short normal map or a normal map loss, the effect shown in FIG. 117 (8) is repeatedly executed.

  Next, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening and the special symbol fluctuates and the result is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 117 (10), the ally and the enemy character battle and “Aim Up!” Is displayed (see steps S8411, S8414, S8456, S8457).

  Next, when the game ball that has won the winning combination 20 wins the specific winning opening 66A and becomes a V winning big hit, as shown in FIGS. 118 (1), (2), and (3), the ally character is the enemy. An effect is displayed in which a character string such as “Battle Victory! Jackpot” is displayed when the character is won by battle (see steps S8469, S8474, and S8503). After that, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  If the game ball does not win the prize 20 or if it does not win the specific winning slot 66A even if it wins the prize 20 (that is, loses), An effect is displayed in which an ally character loses the enemy character in a battle and displays a character string such as “End of Chance Time!”. If the normal variable winning ball device 61 is controlled to be in the open state and the start winning opening is controlled to be able to win, but the start winning is not made, the character string such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed on the left. The direction navigation effect is ended, and an effect in a mode in which the battle between the ally and the enemy character but the battle is not settled is executed. Then, after that, when the next normal symbol variation display is already being executed, the process proceeds to the effect of FIG. 119 or 120 depending on whether or not it is a long ordinary symbol and the remaining variation display time. .

  FIG. 119 and FIG. 120 show the display modes of special effects that are executed during the remaining time of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol is already being executed at the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol or at the end of the small hit. Show. Among these, FIG. 119 is a display mode of special effects when the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol currently being executed is per long common figure (see steps S8560, S8564, S8707, and S8708). FIG. 120 is a display mode of special effects when the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol currently being executed is per ordinary map loss or short diagram (see steps S8561, S8564, S8707, and S8708).

  When the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is longer than 30 seconds per 30 seconds or more, as shown in FIG. 119 (1), the female character and the time bomb appear, and the time bomb The remaining time of the fluctuation display is displayed as the time until the explosion. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (2), a character for releasing the time bomb is introduced, and as shown in FIGS. 119 (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), the remaining time until the explosion ( Depending on the remaining time of the fluctuation display, each character's lines like “Do your best!”, “I ’m doing my best!”, “It's 3 seconds left!”, “2 seconds left!”, “1 second!” indicate. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (7), the time bomb is successfully released and a character string such as “I was saved!” Is displayed.

  If the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is longer than 20 seconds and less than 30 seconds per long long figure, as shown in FIG. 119 (8), a female character and a time bomb appear. The remaining time of the variable display is displayed as the time until the explosion of the time bomb. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (9), a character that releases the time bomb appears, and as shown in FIGS. 119 (9), (4), (5), and (6), the remaining time until the explosion (variation display Depending on the remaining time), the lines of each character such as “early!”, “3 seconds left!”, “2 seconds left!”, “1 second!” Are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (7), the time bomb is successfully released and a character string such as “I was saved!” Is displayed. Therefore, when the remaining time of the variation time is 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds and when it is 30 seconds or more, the line of characters displayed on the effect display device 9 is slightly different depending on the remaining time of the variation time.

  When the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is long and less than 20 seconds per long long picture, as shown in FIGS. 119 (10) and (11), the effect display device 9 After displaying the production design (so-called reach-out design) with only the same design in place, the female character applies magic and all the left middle, right and right are in the same design so that it becomes per unit Execute a dramatic production. Further, when the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than 5 seconds per the long normal symbol, as shown in FIG. An effect of displaying a character string such as “is executed.

  When the remaining time of the normal symbol variation display is 30 seconds or more per normal map loss or short normal map, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), a female character and a time bomb appear. At the same time, the remaining time of the fluctuation display is displayed as the time until the explosion of the time bomb. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (2), a character that releases the time bomb appears, and as shown in FIGS. 120 (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), the remaining time until the explosion ( Depending on the remaining time of the fluctuation display, each character's lines like “Do your best!”, “I ’m doing my best!”, “It's 3 seconds left!”, “2 seconds left!”, “1 second!” indicate. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (7), an effect is produced in which the release of the time bomb has failed and the time bomb has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (15), the lost symbols in which the left, middle and right effect symbols are not aligned with the same symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, in the first decorative symbol display area 9a, the lost symbol or the symbol per short normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol of the first decorative symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 120 (15), the symbol (yellow) per short common map is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when the next normal symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the production symbol variation display is started in synchronization with the next ordinary symbol variation display.

  When the remaining time of the normal symbol variation display being 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds per normal map loss or short normal map, as shown in FIG. 120 (8), the female character and the time bomb And the remaining time of the variable display is displayed as the time until the time bomb explodes. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (9), a character that releases the time bomb appears, and as shown in FIGS. 120 (9), (4), (5), and (6), the remaining time until the explosion (variation display Depending on the remaining time), the lines of each character such as “early!”, “3 seconds left!”, “2 seconds left!”, “1 second!” Are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (7), an effect is produced in which the release of the time bomb has failed and the time bomb has exploded. Therefore, when the remaining time of the variation time is 20 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds and when it is 30 seconds or more, the line of characters displayed on the effect display device 9 is slightly different depending on the remaining time of the variation time. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (15), the lost symbols in which the left, middle and right effect symbols are not aligned with the same symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, in the first decorative symbol display area 9a, the lost symbol or the symbol per short normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol of the first decorative symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 120 (15), the symbol (yellow) per short common map is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when the next normal symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the production symbol variation display is started in synchronization with the next ordinary symbol variation display.

  When the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is 3 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds per normal map loss or short normal map, as shown in FIG. After the stop symbols (hit symbols) with the same symbols are stopped and displayed, the effect symbols are changed again as shown in FIG. 120 (11). Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (12), after shifting to the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (13), the effect effect in the middle is shifted to the low speed fluctuation, and finally, in FIG. 120 (15). As shown in the figure, the losing symbols in which the left, middle and right effect symbols are not aligned with the same symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, in the first decorative symbol display area 9a, the lost symbol or the symbol per short normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol of the first decorative symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 120 (15), the symbol (yellow) per short common map is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when the next normal symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the production symbol variation display is started in synchronization with the next ordinary symbol variation display.

  When the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than 3 seconds per normal map losing or short normal symbol, the left, middle and right effect symbols are the same as shown in FIG. 120 (14). Lost symbols that are not aligned with symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, when the remaining time of the variable display has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 120 (15), the lost symbols in which the left, middle and right effect symbols are not aligned with the same symbol are displayed in a fixed stop manner. In this case, in the first decorative symbol display area 9a, the lost symbol or the symbol per short normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol of the first decorative symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 120 (15), the symbol (yellow) per short common map is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when the next normal symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the production symbol variation display is started in synchronization with the next ordinary symbol variation display.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when a game medium wins the normal variable winning ball device 61 based on the long regular game, and when the game medium is a normal variable prize based on the short regular game. Whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state is determined according to a common process when the ball apparatus 61 is won. Therefore, by sharing the processing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the determination processing for determining whether to shift to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the game medium is shifted to the big hit game state based on the winning of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 based on the long usual figure, and based on the short usual figure. A common big-hit gaming effect is executed when the game medium is shifted to the big-hit gaming state based on the winning of the normal variable winning ball device 61. Therefore, by sharing the effects, it is possible to reduce the processing burden when executing the effects during the big hit game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that it is determined to be per long common map, one general pattern variation pattern is determined from among a plurality of general pattern variation patterns per long general map. In addition, when a common figure is determined to be lost and a case where it is determined to be a short common figure, a common figure variation pattern for a plurality of lost / short common figures is selected according to a common process. Determine the figure variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to execute the same variable display effect using the same normal pattern variation pattern in the case where it is determined that there is a general map loss and in the case where it is determined that the short normal map. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player misidentifies that a game ball is likely to win the normal variable winning ball device 61 even though the normal ball is difficult to win the normal variable winning ball device 61. can do. Further, by sharing the processing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for determining the normal variation pattern. Furthermore, even when the same effect as the variable display effect that is executed when it is determined that the usual game is lost, it is possible to provide a case where the game ball wins the normal variable winning ball device 61. In addition, the variable display effect can be surprising.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern type of the normal symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the normal symbol variation pattern type determination random number. Next, the normal pattern variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined using the normal symbol variation pattern determining random number from the general pattern variation patterns included in the determined general pattern variation pattern type. For this reason, even if a variety of normal fluctuation patterns are provided, the selection process of each normal fluctuation pattern can be achieved by performing the determination process of the normal fluctuation pattern by a two-stage determination process using two random numbers. Can be easily designed to achieve a desired selectivity.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the normal map is lost, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is displayed for the first time. In addition, when it is determined that the winning is a short normal figure, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is displayed for the second time, and then the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) for the third time. Time control. The first time is set to be approximately the same as the time obtained by adding the third time to the second time. Therefore, the time when the variable display result is displayed is the same even when the same variable display effect is executed in the case where it is determined that the normal map is lost and in the case where it is determined that it is per short normal map. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the difference.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing the display timing of the normal symbol variation display result and the opening timing of the normal variable winning ball apparatus. Among these, FIG. 121 (A) shows the display timing of the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol and the opening timing of the normal variable winning ball apparatus in the case of per short normal game. FIG. 121 (B) shows the display timing of the variation display result of the normal symbol and the opening timing of the normal variable winning ball apparatus in the case of the usual game lose.

  In the case of a short normal symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the symbol display time (second time) per normal symbol when the normal symbol variation time ends (see step S276), and in FIG. 121 (A). As shown, the normal symbol hit symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S103). When the symbol display time per normal symbol elapses, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a predetermined time (third time) so that the start winning a prize can be made at the start winning opening. Control (see steps S163, S164, S172). In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the production control microcomputer 100 extends from the normal symbol display time (second time) to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 opening time (third time). Then, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol (see steps S8154, S8165, S8166, S8255).

  On the other hand, in the case of normal figure loss, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol loss symbol display time (first time) when the normal symbol change time is finished (see step S277), and FIG. 121 (B). As shown, the normal symbol losing symbol is stopped and displayed until the normal symbol losing symbol display time elapses (see step S103). In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the production control microcomputer 100 stops displaying the lost symbol as a stop symbol of the production symbol until the normal symbol loss symbol display time (first time) elapses. (See steps S8154, S8165, S8166, S8255).

  As shown in FIGS. 121 (A) and 121 (B), the loss symbol display time (first time) at the time of the usual figure loss is the normal variable winning ball at the hit symbol display time (second time) at the time of the short usual figure. Since the opening time (third time) of the device 61 is set to substantially the same time as the player, the effect display device 9 is displayed in the case of the usual figure losing and the case of the short usual figure when viewed from the player. It is possible to make it appear that the lost symbols are displayed for substantially the same time, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in the state where the game ball has not won the normal variable winning ball device 61, an effect corresponding to the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 61 is executed. In addition, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol variation display result based on the fact that the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 61, the accessory 20 is controlled to be in the open state. Perform the corresponding production. Next, when the display corresponding to the fact that the accessory 20 is controlled to be in the open state is finished, if the normal symbol variation display is being executed, the normal symbol variation display result being executed is long. Different special effects are executed depending on whether or not it is per figure and the remaining time of the fluctuation time. And after performing a special effect, the effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol is performed. For this reason, when switching from the special symbol variation display and the effect that the accessory 20 is controlled to the open state to the state in which the normal symbol variation display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 are controlled to be performed are performed. In addition, it is possible to perform appropriate presentation display.

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings for executing effects corresponding to normal symbol variation display, normal variable winning ball apparatus opening control, and special symbol variation display in the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 122, when it is determined to be per long common symbol and the normal symbol variation display is executed, the effect display device 9 executes the variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the normal symbol variation display. (See steps S8055 to S8062, S8101 to S8115, S8154).

  Next, the winning symbol of the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined period, and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be in the open state for a predetermined period (for example, 5.0 seconds) so as to be able to start winning. During this time, as shown in FIG. 122, the effect display device 9 executes a left navigation effect that displays a character string such as “Aim for the left!” (See steps S8158, S8160, and S8205). Next, when the game ball starts and wins while the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened, the special symbol variation display is started. In the example shown in FIG. 122, the case where the special symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that the winning prize is determined by the start winning is shown. Then, until the special symbol change display is executed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 122, the effect display device 9 displays a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is executed (see steps S8306, S8307 to S8313, and S8351 to S8360).

  Next, the small hit game is started and the accessory 20 is released. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, the effect display device 9 continues the upward navigation effect that displays a character string such as “Aim Up!” (See steps S8412, S8413 to S8415, S8456, S8457). When a game ball enters the first entrance 71 of the accessory 20 (when winning a normal route), for example, a normal route effect in which a female character follows a thief is executed (steps S8462, S8467, S8456). , S8457). Further, when a game ball enters the second entrance 72 of the accessory 20 (at the time of special route winning), for example, a special route effect in which the robot character follows the thief on behalf of the female character is executed (step) S8464, S8467, S8456, S8457).

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 122, even when the variation display of the next normal symbol is started during the special symbol variation display or during the small hit game (in FIG. 122, the next normal symbol variation display during the small hit game). In the effect display device 9, the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol and the effect corresponding to the small hit game is continued without executing the effect corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122, when the small winning game is finished without winning the V winning big win, if the normal symbol fluctuation display is already being executed, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol currently being executed is displayed. A special effect is executed according to whether or not is a long map and the remaining time of the variation time (see steps S8558 to S8565, S8707, and S8708).

  As shown in FIG. 122, in this embodiment, since the special effect is executed when the normal symbol variation display is already executed, the special symbol variation display and the accessory 20 are provided. An appropriate effect display can be performed even when switching from an effect for being controlled to the open state to a state in which the effect corresponding to the open display of the normal symbol variation display and the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is executed. be able to.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control is performed in an advantageous state (short time state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (end of big hit game). When the controlled state is in the advantageous state, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is determined to be per long regular symbol with a higher probability (for example, 50%) than in the normal state. Therefore, an advantageous state advantageous to the player can be provided without complicating the control.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, a common winning command (for example, a special figure variation pattern command) is transmitted when it is determined per long common figure and when it is determined per short common figure. Therefore, by sharing the winning command, the number of commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be in an open state based on the determination that the long regular hit is reached, the game ball wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61. In the case where the game ball does not win the normal variable winning ball device 61 when the normal variable winning ball device 61 is controlled to be in the open state based on the fact that it has been determined to be per short normal figure. , A common non-winning command (for example, the next general variation pattern command) is transmitted. Therefore, by sharing the non-winning command, the number of commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, a common normal variation pattern command is transmitted when it is determined that the normal map is lost and when it is determined that the short normal map is detected. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect display effect display of the effect symbol corresponding to the ordinary pattern variation pattern specified by the transmitted ordinary diagram variation pattern command. For this reason, it is possible to execute the same variation display effect based on the common variation map command in the case where it is determined that there is a general map loss and in the case where it is determined that it is per short common map. Therefore, a situation in which a player mistakenly recognizes that a game ball is likely to win the normal variable variable ball device 15 despite the fact that the game ball is difficult to win in the normal variable ball device 61 is difficult. Can be prevented. In addition, by sharing the common variation pattern command, the number of commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a winning command (for example, a special figure variation pattern command) after receiving a display result command that can specify that it has been determined that the game is determined to be a short ordinary figure, a special effect is given. Run. Therefore, even if the same effect as the effect of the variable display that is executed when it is determined to be lost in the usual figure is executed, the game ball is placed in the ordinary figure variable winning ball device 15 at the time of the short ordinary figure. Since a special performance is executed when a prize is won, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by making the performance surprising.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the normally variable winning ball device 61 is not controlled to be in the open state, the winning ball game is detected by the start port count switch 60. Then, a start winning abnormality notification designation command is transmitted. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 performs abnormality notification based on the transmitted start prize abnormality notification designation command. Therefore, when an abnormal winning to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 occurs, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality. In particular, even when a common variation display effect is executed between a case where it is determined that the game is lost and a case where it is determined that it is per short map, the game ball is placed in the normal variable winning ball device 61. When it is determined that there is no regular losing to win a prize, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, when the special symbol variation display or the small hit game is not executed, the effect display device 9 displays an effect corresponding to the normal symbol variation display or the opening control of the ordinary variable winning ball device 61. In the case where the special symbol variation display and the small hit game are executed, the case where the special symbol variation display and the small hit game are preferentially executed has been described. On the other hand, for example, when the gaming state is an advantageous state (short-time state), a special symbol variation display or an effect corresponding to the small hit game is preferentially executed, and the gaming state is the normal state For example, the presentation corresponding to the change display of the normal symbol and the opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 may be executed with priority. Hereinafter, when the gaming state is in an advantageous state (short-time state), the special symbol variation display and the effect corresponding to the small hit game are preferentially executed, and when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol A second embodiment will be described in which an effect corresponding to the fluctuation display and the opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is preferentially executed.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 123, this embodiment includes a time reduction start designation command (command E500 (H)) instead of the time reduction number designation command (command E5XX (H)) shown in the first embodiment. . In FIG. 123, a command E500 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction start designation command) indicating that the time reduction state has started. The effect control commands other than the short time start designation command are the same as the effect control commands shown in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S310) in the second embodiment. In the jackpot ending process in this embodiment, the processes in steps S531 to S545 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In step S546A, CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction start designation command to effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S547).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704) in the second embodiment. In the command analysis process in this embodiment, the processes in steps S610 to S653 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction start designation command (step S654A), the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag indicating that the gaming state is a time reduction state (step S655A). Further, if the received effect control command is a time reduction end designation command (step S656A), the time reduction state flag is reset (step S657A).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S658). Then, the process proceeds to step S610.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S8000A). If the time reduction state flag is not set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8001A). If set, the CPU 101 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S8002A).

  If the time-short state flag is set (Y in step S800A, that is, if the time-short state), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special figure variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S8003A). ). If set, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure corresponding effect start process (step S806) (step S8004A).

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the effect symbol variation start process does not include the processes in steps S8052 and S8053 shown in FIG. Note that processes other than steps S8052 and S8053 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stopping process (step S803) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the effect symbol variation stop process does not include the processes of steps S8153, S8156, S8157, S8162, and S8163 shown in FIG. 90, and the first embodiment. Different. Note that the processes other than steps S8153, S8156, S8157, S8162, and S8163 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating the universal hit display processing (step S804) according to the second embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the universal hit display process does not include steps S8201 and S8209 to S8215 shown in FIG. 91. Note that processes other than steps S8201 and S8209 to S8215 are the same as those described in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129, in this embodiment, when the hit display display period measurement timer times out in the normal figure display process (see Y in step S8203), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8216A).

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose losing display process (step S805) according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the general-purpose losing display process does not include the processes of steps S8251, S8259, and S8260 shown in FIG. Note that the processes other than steps S8251, S8259, and S8260 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing special figure corresponding effect start processing (step S806) in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 131, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the special figure corresponding effect start process does not include the processes of steps S8302 to S8305 shown in FIG. Note that the processes other than steps S8302 to S8305 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing special figure corresponding effect stop processing (step S808) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 132, the special figure corresponding effect stop process does not include the processes of steps S8404, S8405, S8410, and S8411 shown in FIG. 95, and is different from the first embodiment. . Note that the processes other than steps S8404, S8405, S8410, and S8411 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 133 and FIG. 134 are flowcharts showing the small hit game processing (step S809) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the small hit game process does not include the processes of steps S8460, S8468, S8469, S8476 to S8480 shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. Different from the first embodiment. Note that the processes other than steps S8460, S8468, S8469, and S8476 to S8480 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing special figure loss display processing (step S811) according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 135, in this embodiment, when the special figure losing display period measurement timer times out (Y in step S8552), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the time reduction state flag is set ( Step S8557A). If it is set (that is, if the time is short), the process proceeds to step S8566. If it is not set (that is, if it is a normal state), it will transfer to the process after step S8558. In addition, processes other than step S8557A are the same as those processes shown in 1st Embodiment.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the big hit after-effect process (step S813) according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 136, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the post-hit effect processing does not include steps S8659 to S8665 shown in FIG. Note that the processes other than steps S8659 to S8665 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing special effect processing (step S814) according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 137, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the special effect process does not include steps S8710, S8711, S8716, and S8717 shown in FIG. Note that processes other than steps S8710, S8711, S8716, and S8717 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, an effect corresponding to the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is executed in the normal state. In the state controlled to the advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the fact that the accessory 20 is controlled to the open state is executed. Next, after the effect is controlled, when the effect corresponding to the fact that the accessory 20 is controlled to be in the open state based on the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays, the normal symbol fluctuation display is performed. If it is being executed, a special effect that differs depending on whether or not the display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is per long common figure and the remaining time of the fluctuation display is executed. And after performing a special effect, it is comprised so that the effect corresponding to the fluctuation | variation display of the next normal symbol may be performed. Therefore, even when the advantageous state is ended and the gaming state is switched to a state that is not in the advantageous state, it is possible to perform appropriate effect display.

  FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings for executing effects corresponding to normal symbol variation display, normal variable winning ball apparatus opening control, and special symbol variation display in the effect display device according to the second embodiment. is there. As shown in FIG. 138, when the game state is controlled to the advantageous state (short-time state), even if the normal symbol variation display is started, the effect symbol variation display synchronized with the normal symbol variation display is performed. Not executed (see step S8000A). Further, as shown in FIG. 138, when the gaming state is controlled to be in an advantageous state (short time state), even if the normally variable winning ball device 61 is controlled to be in the open state, the effect display device 9 performs left navigation. Production is not executed. However, even if the gaming state is controlled to the advantageous state (short time state), the first decorative symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the normal symbol variation display.

  Next, when the game ball starts and wins while the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened, the special symbol variation display is started. In the example shown in FIG. 138, a case is shown in which a special symbol variation display is executed on the basis of the fact that it has been determined that the winning prize is a start winning prize. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 138, the case where the started special symbol variation display is the last special symbol variation display indicated by the number of short-time continuations is shown. Then, until the special symbol variation display is executed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 138, the effect display device 9 displays a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is executed (see steps S8306, S8307 to S8313, and S8351 to S8360). Note that, based on the fact that the last special symbol change display indicated by the number of time reductions has ended, as shown in FIG. 138, the advantageous state (time reduction state) is ended, and the gaming state is changed to the normal state.

  Next, the small hit game is started and the accessory 20 is released. In this case, as shown in FIG. 138, the upward navigation effect of displaying a character string such as “Aim Up!” Is continued on the effect display device 9 (see steps S8412, S8413 to S8415, S8456, S8457). When a game ball enters the first entrance 71 of the accessory 20 (when winning a normal route), for example, a normal route effect in which a female character follows a thief is executed (steps S8462, S8467, S8456). , S8457). Further, when a game ball enters the second entrance 72 of the accessory 20 (at the time of special route winning), for example, a special route effect in which the robot character follows the thief on behalf of the female character is executed (step) S8464, S8467, S8456, S8457).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 138, when the small winning game is finished without becoming the V winning big hit, when the advantageous state (short time state) is finished and the normal symbol variation display is already being executed, A special effect is executed according to whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol currently being executed is per long regular figure and the remaining time of the fluctuation time (see steps S8558 to S8565, S8707, and S8708).

  After that, when the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the effect display device 9 executes the variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol. (Refer to Y in step S8000A, S8055-S8062, S8101-S8115, S8154). On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to the normal state, even if the special symbol variation display or the small hit game is executed, the effect corresponding to the normal symbol variation display and the opening control of the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 Is preferentially executed (see Y in step S8000A).

  Further, according to each of the embodiments described above, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, the movable portion 63 is configured to advance obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction when the movable portion 63 advances to the game area side. Has been. Therefore, when the movable portion 63 is advanced to the game area side, the advance operation is performed obliquely upward, thereby preventing a situation where a ball is clogged or a game ball is sandwiched between the protruding member and the front glass. And the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, the game ball that has entered the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 can be promptly guided to the starting area.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, the movable part 63 is provided with the plate-shaped part formed in plate shape, and a plate-shaped part is the game area side most. There is an inclined portion 63b whose thickness decreases in the direction from the tip portion side toward the root side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the normal variable winning ball device 61 can be more quickly guided to the starting area.

  Further, according to each of the embodiments described above, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61, the movable portion 63 is disposed below the passage, and the upper wall portion that faces the movable portion 63 and forms the passage. However, it is provided with an inclined portion 67b that approaches the movable portion 63 as it moves away from the game area side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the normal variable winning ball device 61 can be more quickly guided to the starting area.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, the decoration part 65 which coat | covers a channel | path is provided in the front side of the channel | path. Therefore, the amount of game balls that can be passed around the entrance 67 that can accommodate the movable portion 63 can be minimized, and a situation in which the game balls enter the entrance 67 more than necessary can be prevented. Specifically, in a gaming machine, generally, a space through which one or more game balls can pass is provided between the game area on the game board 6 and the front glass, so that the movable portion 63 is located inside the game area. Even when the player is moving backward, the game ball may enter the entrance area 67 from the front side with respect to the game area. By providing the decoration portion 65 in the forward direction of the entrance 67, it is possible to eliminate the game balls that enter the game area from the front direction and prevent the game balls from entering the entrance 67 more than necessary. Can do.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, since the front side of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is covered with the decoration portion 65, the movable portion 63 moves forward or backward. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the movement. In this embodiment, there are two types of cases, in which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a long time (for example, 5.0 seconds) and opened for only a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). Although there is an open state, the decoration unit 65 can make it difficult to recognize which open state, and even when the variable variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a short time, the player's It is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

  Further, according to each embodiment described above, the game control microcomputer 560 is advantageous to the player when the movable portion 63 is advanced to the game area side in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61. (In this embodiment, the movable part 63 is advanced for a long time (5.0 seconds).) The first movable member control for controlling the movable part 63 and the player compared with the first movable member control. The second movable member control for controlling the movable member is performed so as to be disadvantageous (in this embodiment, the movable portion 63 is advanced for a short time (1.0 second)). Therefore, the playability can be improved by moving the movable portion 63 by a plurality of types of movable modes.

  Further, according to each of the embodiments described above, the game ball is provided in a path through which the game ball can enter in the game area, and the game ball is moved to the start area by moving forward in the game area. While being able to be guided, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 having a movable portion 63 that does not guide the game ball to the starting area by retreating from the game area side is provided. Further, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61, the movable portion 63 is an entry facilitating portion that facilitates guiding the game ball to the starting region in a state where the movable portion 63 has advanced to the game region side (the movable portion 63 is in the horizontal direction). And an intrusion prevention unit (of the movable part 63) that prevents the game ball from entering the starting area in a state of retreating from the game area side. Board thickness). Therefore, when the starting area is formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 including the movable portion 63 including the approach facilitating part and the approach preventing part, it may be interesting to enter the game ball into the starting area. And game playability can be improved. In addition, by having such a configuration of the start area, the game ball can smoothly enter the start area when the game ball enters, and the game ball can enter the start area when the movable portion 63 moves backward. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, the movable part 63 is provided with the plate-shaped part formed in plate shape, and the opening part 63a is provided in the plate-shaped part. ing. Therefore, by being guided by the opening 63a provided in a plate shape, the entered game ball can be reliably guided to the starting area.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 includes the movable portion 63 only below the entrance 67 is shown. A movable part may also be provided above. FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61. In FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 139, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 includes a movable portion 63 below the entrance 67 and an auxiliary movable portion 68 above the entrance 67. The auxiliary movable portion 68 is connected to the movable portion solenoid 62 via an auxiliary connecting member 69.

  When controlling the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 to the open state, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the movable member solenoid 62 is driven to rotate the connecting member 64 around the fixed portion 64b. The advancing operation is performed so that the movable portion 63 protrudes toward the game area side. Further, according to the operation of the movable part solenoid 62, the auxiliary connecting member 69 connected to the movable part solenoid 62 performs the backward movement operation. Then, the auxiliary movable portion 68 also performs the backward movement to the back side of the entrance 67 in accordance with the backward movement of the auxiliary connecting member 69. As described above, when the movable portion 63 moves forward and the auxiliary movable portion 68 moves backward, the size of the opening surface 67a of the entrance 67 increases and the game ball can enter. In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), a tip part of the movable part 63 is provided with an inclined part 63c that is inclined obliquely downward from the front side to the back side of the movable part 63. The game ball that has reached the movable portion 63 is guided into the entrance 67 by an inclined portion 63c provided at the distal end of the movable portion 63 (corresponding to an entry assisting portion together with the inclined portion 63b provided in the movable portion 63). .

  Further, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is controlled to be closed again, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the driving of the movable part solenoid 62 is stopped, so that the movable part 63 is moved backward. At the same time, the auxiliary movable portion 68 performs the advance operation. By operating in such a manner, the size of the opening surface 67a of the entrance 67 becomes smaller by the thickness of the movable portion 63 and the auxiliary movable portion 68 which are plate-like members, which is larger than the size of one game ball. It becomes small and the game ball cannot enter.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes steps S162 and S173 to drive the movable part solenoid 62, so that the movable part 63 advances. The auxiliary movable portion 68 is moved backward from the game area side, and the auxiliary movable portion 68 is controlled to advance as the movable portion 63 moves backward from the game area side.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 139, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61, the movable portion 63 includes a plate-like portion formed in a plate shape, and the plate-like portion is located at the tip portion closest to the game area. There is an inclined portion 63c whose thickness decreases in the direction from the partial side toward the root side. Therefore, the guided game ball can be quickly guided to the starting area by being guided by the inclined portion 63c provided on the plate-like portion of the movable portion 63.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 139, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 advances to the game area side in the passage separately from the movable section 63, while the auxiliary movable section 68 moves backward from the game area side. Is provided. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game ball to be guided to the start area by retreating the auxiliary movable section 68 from the game area side as the movable section 63 advances, and the movable section 63 controls the game area. Control is performed so that the game ball cannot enter the starting area by advancing the auxiliary movable portion 68 as it moves backward from the side. Therefore, by performing control using both the movable portion 63 and the auxiliary movable portion 68, it is possible to more accurately realize a state where the game ball can enter the start area and a state where the game ball cannot enter. In particular, when the game ball reaches the entrance 67 just before the movable portion 63 is moved backward, the auxiliary movable portion 68 that moves forward can repel the game ball that is about to enter, and the game ball enters the start area. An inaccessible state can be realized accurately.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, it is the front side of the movable member 77, performs the predetermined 2nd movable aspect, and the movable production | presentation member 78 arrange | positioned so that it may overlap with the movable member 77 is carried out. Is provided. In addition, in response to the fact that the game control microcomputer 560 controls the movable member 77 to the predetermined first movable mode, the production control microcomputer 100 moves the presentation member 78 to the predetermined second movable mode. . Therefore, the player is given more attention to the movement of the effect member 78 by moving the effect member 78 arranged on the front side of the movable member 77 in accordance with the movable mode of the movable member 77. Can do. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with the movable member 77, it is possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, it arrange | positions so that the production | generation member 78 and the movable member 77 whole may be covered in the state which is not controlled by the predetermined 2nd movable aspect. Therefore, the effect member 78 can be noticed by the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, the production | presentation member 78 is arrange | positioned in the position which does not influence the behavior of the game ball which approached in the variable winning ball apparatus (combination object) 20. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 78 from affecting the movement of the game ball in the variable winning ball apparatus 20, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, the movable member 77 is comprised using the transparent or substantially transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the movable member 77. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention only to the effect member 78, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, the presentation display apparatus 9 which has a predetermined | prescribed display area is provided. Further, the movable member 77 is arranged in a mode overlapping with the display area of the effect display device 9 in a state where the movable member 77 is controlled in the predetermined first movable mode, and the effect member 78 is controlled in the predetermined second movable mode. In this state, the display area of the effect display device 9 is arranged so as to overlap. Therefore, the movable member 77 and the effect member 78 can be moved so as to overlap the front side of the display area where various displays are performed. Therefore, more attention can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to each of the embodiments described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 is performing variable display of the effect symbols on the effect display device 9, the same aspect as the predetermined second movable aspect or Control for moving the effect member 78 in a similar manner is performed. Therefore, the effect member 78 can be used for a jackpot notice or reach notice effect performed during variable display. In addition, by performing an effect using the effect member 78 in the same or similar manner to the case where it is easy to win a specific winning opening 66A that has been shifted to the small hit game state, the player is likely to be a big hit or reach. It is possible to easily grasp this, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided with the second storage part capable of storing game balls in the second guide path, and the second storage part is a movable member 77. It is provided so that it may be located in the upstream rather than. Therefore, by allowing the game balls to be stored in the second storage unit, it is possible to easily delay the timing until the game balls distributed to the second guide route reach the predetermined entry area.

  In addition, according to each of the embodiments described above, the variable winning ball apparatus (combination) 20 is provided with the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 through which the game ball can enter, and the first entry The mouth 71 is formed in a mode in which a game ball can easily enter as compared with the second entrance 72. Further, in the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 66A when the gaming ball enters the second entrance, compared to when the gaming ball enters the first entrance 71. It is formed in an easy mode. Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrances 71 and 72 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, it can be divided into a route that is likely to enter the specific winning opening 66A and a route that is difficult to enter. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the operation of the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B provided at the entrance portion of the variable winning ball device 20, and the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 20. At the same time, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 66A.

  For example, when configured as a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-223100, after a game ball has entered the variable winning ball apparatus, it is specified by a sorting member provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. The route is divided into a route that makes it easy to win a prize and a route that is difficult to win. Therefore, when the game ball enters the variable winning ball apparatus, there is no difference in the ease of V winning to the specific winning opening, and the game is played on a movable object such as an open door provided at the entrance of the variable winning ball apparatus. It is not possible to attract the attention of the person. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the entrances 71 and 72 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, it can be divided into a route that is likely to enter the specific winning opening and a route that is difficult to enter. The player's attention can be drawn to the operation of the open doors 76A and 76B provided at the entrances 71 and 72 of the apparatus 20.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a case is shown in which the second opening door 76B is made smaller than the first opening door 76A, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 72. . That is, in this embodiment, by configuring the first opening door 76A to be larger than the second opening door 76B, the area that receives the game ball of the second opening door 76B in the opened state of the opening doors 76A and 76B. The area for receiving the game ball of the first open door 76A is made larger, and the second entrance 72 is less likely to enter the game ball than the first entrance 71. In addition, the aspect which makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 72 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, by providing a member that obstructs the entry of the game ball in the vicinity of the second entrance 72, the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 72 than the first entrance 71. You may comprise as follows. Further, for example, the game ball that has reached the second opening door 76B by making the inclination angle of the first opening door 76A larger than the inclination angle of the second opening door 76B when the opening doors 76A and 76B are opened. Rather than rolling into the second entrance 72, the game ball that has reached the first opening door 76 </ b> A is easier to roll into the first entrance 71, and compared to the first entrance 71, the second entrance 72. The game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter. Further, for example, by making the height and width of the opening of the first entrance 71 larger than the height and width of the opening of the second entrance 72, the first entrance 71 is more playable than the second entrance 72. You may comprise so that a ball | bowl may enter easily.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, the 1st open door 76A and the 2nd open door 76B are integrally formed. Therefore, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B can be easily formed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are configured integrally is shown, but the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are separately provided. You may comprise as these parts. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view and a perspective view showing another example of the opening / closing mechanism portion of the open door of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In the example shown in FIG. 140, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are each formed in a substantially plate shape. Further, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are not connected, and are configured as separate components. The first open door 76A has a flat first surface portion 76a located on the upper surface side in the open state, and is formed to have a width (width C shown in FIG. 140) through which at least one game ball can pass. ing. The first surface portion 76a faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the first entrance 71 so as to be able to guide the game ball to the first entrance 71. Further, the second open door 76B has a flat second surface portion 76b located on the upper surface side in the opened state, and is formed to have a width (width D shown in FIG. 140) through which at least one game ball can pass. ing. The second surface portion 76 b faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the second entrance 72 so that the game ball can be guided to the second entrance 72. The first opening door 76A is larger than the second opening door 76B (specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, the length A in the longitudinal direction of the first opening door 76A is the length of the second opening door 76B). Longer than the length B in the direction). Further, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are arranged at positions where they do not overlap each other (the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are controlled to be in the closed state). The surface portion 76a and the second surface portion 76b are disposed so as not to overlap each other). Further, the movable area of each open door 76A, 76B when the open doors 76A, 76B move from the closed state to the open state has a fan shape, but in the example shown in FIG. 140, the first open door 76A and the first door The two open doors 76B are arranged so that the fan-shaped movable areas do not overlap each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 140, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the opening solenoid 75 to move the first opening door 76A to move the first opening door 76A formed in a substantially plate shape in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the first opening door 76A is made to protrude outward with respect to the first entrance 71 (see the upper left figure of FIG. 140) by opening the first opening door 76A. Control to the state. That is, the first open door 76A is set in a state of being inclined in the oblique direction with respect to the surface of the game area 7, and the first open door 76A is controlled to be in the open state. Further, the first opening door 76A is moved so that the first opening door 76A covers the whole or part of the first entrance 71, thereby controlling the first opening door 76A in the closed state. Of the first surface portion 76a of the first open door 76A, a wall portion 76G that is slightly higher than the surface of the first surface portion 76a is formed at the end that is closest to the front surface when the first open door 76A is open. In the opened state of the first opening door 76A, the game ball hitting the first surface portion 76a is prevented from flowing back to the side opposite to the first entrance 71 due to the reaction, making it easy to guide to the first entrance 71. . In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the opening solenoid 75 to move the second opening door 76B to move the second opening door 76B formed in a substantially plate shape obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction. The second opening door 76B is protruded obliquely upward with respect to the second entrance 72 (see the upper left figure of FIG. 140), and the second opening door 76B is controlled to be in the opened state. . That is, the second open door 76B is set in a state of being inclined in an oblique direction with respect to the surface of the game area 7, and the second open door 76B is controlled to be in an open state. Further, the second open door 76B is moved so that the second open door 76B covers the whole or a part of the second entrance 72, thereby controlling the second open door 76B to the closed state. Of the second surface portion 76b of the second open door 76B, a wall portion 76H that is slightly higher than the surface of the second surface portion 76b is formed at the end that is closest to the front surface when the second open door 76B is open. In the open state of the second open door 76B, the game ball that hits the second surface portion 76b is prevented from recoiling and flowing back to the opposite side to the second entrance 72, and is easily guided to the second entrance 72. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 140, when the game control microcomputer 560 moves the first open door 76A to control the first open door 76A to the open state, the game control microcomputer 560 is interlocked with the first open door 76A. 76B is moved and the 2nd open door 76B is controlled to an open state. Specifically, the first opening door 76A is provided with a rotating shaft 76E at a portion facing the lower side of the first entrance 71, and the first opening door 76A can be driven to rotate about the rotating shaft 76E. It is configured. The second opening door 76B is provided with a rotating shaft 76F at a portion facing the lower side of the second entrance 72, and the second opening door 76B is configured to be rotationally driven around the rotating shaft 76F. ing. In addition, a drive component (not shown in FIG. 140) is connected to the rotation shaft 76E of the first open door 76A, and a drive component (not shown in FIG. 140) is connected to the rotation shaft 76F of the second open door 76B. It is connected. When the release solenoid 75 is driven by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), each drive component is driven by the release solenoid 75, and each of the drive parts is rotated counterclockwise about the rotation shafts 76E and 76F. When the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are simultaneously driven to rotate, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are interlocked and open. Note that an opening solenoid for driving the first opening door 76A and an opening solenoid for driving the second opening door 76B are separately provided, and the CPU 56 drives the two opening solenoids at the same time, whereby the first opening door 76A and the first opening door 76A are driven. The two open doors 76B may be controlled to be opened in conjunction with each other. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 moves the second open door 76B to control the first open door 76A to the closed state, the game control microcomputer 560 moves the second open door 76B in conjunction with the first open door 76A. The second open door 76B is controlled to be closed. Specifically, when the opening solenoid 75 is stopped by the CPU 56, the driving components are stopped by the opening solenoid 75, and the first opening door 76A and the second opening are clockwise about the rotation shafts 76E and 76F, respectively. When the door 76B is driven to rotate at the same time, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are interlocked to be in a closed state. An opening solenoid that drives the first opening door 76A and an opening solenoid that drives the second opening door 76B are provided separately, and the CPU 56 stops driving the two opening solenoids at the same time. The second open door 76B may be controlled to be closed in conjunction with the second open door 76B.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 140, when the first open door 76A is controlled to be in the open state by moving the first open door 76A, the game control microcomputer 560 is linked to the first open door 76A. The second open door 76B is controlled to be in an open state by moving the 2 open door 76B. Further, when the first open door 76A is controlled to be closed by moving the first open door 76A, the second open door 76B is moved by moving the second open door 76B in conjunction with the first open door 76A. Control to the closed state. Therefore, the movable mechanism of the first open door 76A provided at the first advance inlet 71 and the second open door 76B provided at the second advance inlet 72 can be shared. Further, the second open door 76B is provided at a position where the second open door 76B is exposed to the game area when the second open door 76B is controlled in the closed state, and is smaller than the first open door 76A. Therefore, the first entrance 71 can be configured to be easier for the game ball to enter than the second entrance 72.

  FIG. 141 is a cross-sectional view and a perspective view showing still another example of the opening / closing mechanism portion of the open door of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In the example shown in FIG. 141, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are each formed in a substantially plate shape. Further, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are not connected, and are configured as separate components. The first open door 76A has a flat first surface portion 76a located on the upper surface side in the opened state, and is formed to have a width (width C shown in FIG. 141) through which at least one game ball can pass. ing. The first surface portion 76a faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the first entrance 71 so as to be able to guide the game ball to the first entrance 71. The second open door 76B has a flat second surface portion 76b located on the upper surface side in the open state, and is formed to have a width (width D shown in FIG. 141) through which at least one game ball can pass. ing. The second surface portion 76 b faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the second entrance 72 so that the game ball can be guided to the second entrance 72. The first opening door 76A is larger than the second opening door 76B (specifically, as shown in FIG. 141, the length E in the longitudinal direction of the first opening door 76A is the length of the second opening door 76B). Longer than the length B in the direction). In addition, the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B are both controlled to be in the closed state, and the first opening door 76A is disposed at a position that covers the second opening door 76B (the first opening). It is arranged at a position where the second surface portion 76b is covered by the surface portion 76a). Further, the movable area of each of the open doors 76A and 76B when the open doors 76A and 76B move from the closed state to the open state has a fan shape, but in the example shown in FIG. The two open doors 76B are arranged so that a part of the sector-shaped movable region overlaps.

  In the example shown in FIG. 141, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the opening solenoid 75 to move the first opening door 76A to move the first opening door 76A formed in a substantially plate shape in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the first opening door 76A is made to protrude outward with respect to the first entrance 71 by making the state inclined obliquely upward (see the upper left figure in FIG. 141), and the first opening door 76A is opened. Control to the state. That is, the first open door 76A is set in a state of being inclined in the oblique direction with respect to the surface of the game area 7, and the first open door 76A is controlled to be in the open state. Further, the first opening door 76A is moved so that the first opening door 76A covers the whole or part of the first entrance 71, thereby controlling the first opening door 76A in the closed state. Of the first surface portion 76a of the first open door 76A, a wall portion 76G that is slightly higher than the surface of the first surface portion 76a is formed at the end that is closest to the front surface when the first open door 76A is open. In the opened state of the first opening door 76A, the game ball hitting the first surface portion 76a is prevented from flowing back to the side opposite to the first entrance 71 due to the reaction, making it easy to guide to the first entrance 71. . In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the opening solenoid 75 to move the second opening door 76B to move the second opening door 76B formed in a substantially plate shape obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction. In this state, the second open door 76B protrudes obliquely upward with respect to the second entrance 72 (see the upper left figure in FIG. 141), and the second open door 76B is controlled to be in the open state. . That is, the second open door 76B is set in a state of being inclined in an oblique direction with respect to the surface of the game area 7, and the second open door 76B is controlled to be in an open state. Further, the second open door 76B is moved so that the second open door 76B covers the whole or a part of the second entrance 72, thereby controlling the second open door 76B to the closed state. Of the second surface portion 76b of the second open door 76B, a wall portion 76H that is slightly higher than the surface of the second surface portion 76b is formed at the end that is closest to the front surface when the second open door 76B is open. In the open state of the second open door 76B, the game ball that hits the second surface portion 76b is prevented from recoiling and flowing back to the opposite side to the second entrance 72, and is easily guided to the second entrance 72. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 141, the game control microcomputer 560 moves the first open door 76A and controls the first open door 76A to the open state. The second open door is interlocked with the first open door 76A. 76B is moved and the 2nd open door 76B is controlled to an open state. Specifically, the first opening door 76A is provided with a rotating shaft 76E at a portion facing the lower side of the first entrance 71, and the first opening door 76A can be driven to rotate about the rotating shaft 76E. It is configured. The second opening door 76B is provided with a rotating shaft 76F at a portion facing the lower side of the second entrance 72, and the second opening door 76B is configured to be rotationally driven around the rotating shaft 76F. ing. Further, a drive component (not shown in FIG. 141) is connected to the rotation shaft 76E of the first open door 76A, and a drive component (not shown in FIG. 141) is connected to the rotation shaft 76F of the second open door 76B. It is connected. When the release solenoid 75 is driven by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), each drive component is driven by the release solenoid 75, and each of the drive parts is rotated counterclockwise about the rotation shafts 76E and 76F. When the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are simultaneously driven to rotate, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are interlocked and open. Note that an opening solenoid for driving the first opening door 76A and an opening solenoid for driving the second opening door 76B are separately provided, and the CPU 56 drives the two opening solenoids at the same time, whereby the first opening door 76A and the first opening door 76A are driven. The two open doors 76B may be controlled to be opened in conjunction with each other. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 moves the second open door 76B to control the first open door 76A to the closed state, the game control microcomputer 560 moves the second open door 76B in conjunction with the first open door 76A. The second open door 76B is controlled to be closed. Specifically, when the opening solenoid 75 is stopped by the CPU 56, the driving components are stopped by the opening solenoid 75, and the first opening door 76A and the second opening are clockwise about the rotation shafts 76E and 76F, respectively. When the door 76B is driven to rotate at the same time, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are interlocked to be in a closed state. An opening solenoid that drives the first opening door 76A and an opening solenoid that drives the second opening door 76B are provided separately, and the CPU 56 stops driving the two opening solenoids at the same time. The second open door 76B may be controlled to be closed in conjunction with the second open door 76B.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 141, when controlling the first open door 76A to the open state by moving the first open door 76A, the game control microcomputer 560 operates in conjunction with the first open door 76A. The second open door 76B is controlled to be in an open state by moving the 2 open door 76B. Further, when the first open door 76A is controlled to be closed by moving the first open door 76A, the second open door 76B is moved by moving the second open door 76B in conjunction with the first open door 76A. Control to the closed state. Therefore, the movable mechanism of the first open door 76A provided at the first advance inlet 71 and the second open door 76B provided at the second advance inlet 72 can be shared. Further, the second open door 76B is provided at a position where the second open door 76B is covered by the first open door 76A when the second open door 76B is controlled in the closed state, as compared with the first open door 76A. small. Therefore, the second opening door 76B provided at the second entrance 72 is disposed inside the first opening door 76A provided at the first entrance 71, whereby the first entrance 71 is changed to the second entrance. Compared to 72, the game ball can be configured to easily enter.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the two opening doors 76A and 76B for changing the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 to the open state or the closed state is shown, but the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided. May be configured to include only one open door. FIG. 142 is a cross-sectional view and a perspective view showing still another example of the opening / closing mechanism portion of the open door of the variable winning ball apparatus. In the example shown in FIG. 142, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 does not enter an open state in which a game ball easily enters the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 that span the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72. Alternatively, one open door 76C that changes to a closed state that is difficult to perform is provided. The open door 76C has a predetermined planar surface portion 76c located on the upper surface side in the open state, and is formed to have a width that allows at least one game ball to pass therethrough. The surface portion 76 c faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72 so as to guide the game ball to the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the opening solenoid 75 to move the opening door 76C so that the opening door 76C is inclined obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the open door 76C protrudes outward from the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72 (see the upper left figure of FIG. 142), and the open door 76C is controlled to the open state. That is, the open door 76C is in a state of being inclined in the oblique direction with respect to the surface of the game area 7, and the open door 76C is controlled to be in the open state. The open door 76C is moved so that the open door 76C covers all or part of the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72, thereby controlling the open door 76C to the closed state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, the opening door 76C is provided with a rotating shaft 76I at a portion facing the lower side of the first entrance 71, and the opening door 76C is configured to be rotationally driven about the rotating shaft 76I. Has been. A driving component (not shown in FIG. 142) is connected to the rotation shaft 76I of the open door 76C. When the opening solenoid 75 is driven by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), the driving component is driven by the opening solenoid 75, and the opening door 76C is rotated counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 76I. By being rotationally driven, the open door 76C is opened. When the opening solenoid 75 is stopped by the CPU 56, the driving components are stopped by the opening solenoid 75, and the opening door 76C is rotated in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft 76I, thereby closing the opening door 76C. It becomes a state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, the open door 76 </ b> C has a game ball at the end of the portion protruding outward with respect to the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72 while being controlled in the open state. A storage portion 76D for storing is formed. The storage portion 76D is formed to have a size capable of storing at least one game ball, and is formed at a position facing the second entrance 72 in a state where the open door 76C is controlled to be closed. ing. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when the open door 76C is in the open state, the game balls stored in the storage portion 76D are moved to the second entrance 72 at the timing when the open door 76C is controlled to be in the closed state. Led. In the example shown in FIG. 142, the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 76D is one.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 142, the storage portion 76D that stores the game ball is formed at the end of the portion that protrudes into the game area while the open door 76C is controlled to be in the open state. In addition, the storage portion 76D is formed at a position where a game ball stored in the storage portion 76D is guided to the second entrance 72 when the open door 76C is controlled to be closed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the game ball stored in the storage portion 76D of the open door 76C to enter the second entrance 72 at the timing when the open door 76C is moved and the open door 76C is closed. In addition, the player can be provided with interest for the entry of the game ball into the second entrance 72.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus 20 having the open door 76C shown in FIG. 142 is also used as a big winning opening (upper large winning opening), a winning number counter is displayed in the big winning opening opening process (see FIG. 54). If the opening doors 76A and 76B are closed and the upper prize winning opening is controlled to be in a closed state based on the fact that the value of 10 becomes 10, it is further stored in the storage portion 76D after the upper prize winning opening is closed. There may be a case where a game ball wins, and there may occur a situation where the number of winnings at the upper prize opening becomes 11. Therefore, when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is also used as an upper prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the fact that the value of the winning number counter becomes 9, for example, during the big prize opening opening process. Then, the open doors 76A and 76B may be closed and the upper prize winning opening may be controlled to be closed. By doing so, even if game balls are stored in the storage unit 76D, the number of winning prizes to the upper prize winning opening can be made 10 or less.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the 1st open door 76A and the 2nd open door 76B were each provided with the substantially flat surface parts 76a and 76b, each surface part of the 1st open door 76A and the 2nd open door 76B was shown. You may make it provide the inclination part for guiding a game ball to 76a, 76b. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view and a perspective view showing still another example of the opening / closing mechanism portion of the open door of the variable winning ball apparatus. In the example shown in FIG. 143, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are each formed in a substantially plate shape, and the connecting portion 76K, which is a plate-like member provided with a notch 76L inside, is provided. And are integrally formed. The first open door 76A, the second open door 76B, and the connecting portion 76K are not formed as separate parts and connected, but are formed integrally by being formed by integral molding using a synthetic resin material. May be. The first open door 76A has a flat first surface portion 76a located on the upper surface side in the open state, and is formed to have a width that allows at least one game ball to pass therethrough. The first surface portion 76a faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the first entrance 71 so as to be able to guide the game ball to the first entrance 71. The second open door 76B has a flat second surface portion 76b positioned on the upper surface side in the open state, and is formed to have a width that allows at least one game ball to pass through. The second surface portion 76 b faces upward in an open state and is positioned below the second entrance 72 so that the game ball can be guided to the second entrance 72. In addition, the first open door 76A includes an inclined portion 76c that is inclined in a direction from the tip portion side, which is the game area side, toward the root side, on the first surface portion 76a. Further, the second open door 76B includes an inclined portion 76d that is inclined in a direction from the tip portion side, which is the game area side, toward the root side, on the second surface portion 76b. In the example shown in FIG. 143, the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B are provided with inclined portions 76c and 76d, respectively, so that the game balls can easily enter the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72, respectively. ing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143, the inclined portion 76c provided on the first surface portion 76a is formed to be longer than the inclined portion 76d provided on the second surface portion 76b. Therefore, the second entrance 72 is further less likely to enter than the first entrance 71. The connecting portion 76K that connects the integrally formed first open door 76A and second open door 76B is provided with a notch 76L, and the integrally formed first open door 76A and second open door 76B. The weight reduction is achieved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 143, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the opening solenoid 75 to move the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B to move the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B. The first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B protrude outward with respect to the first advancement inlet 71 and the second advancement entrance 72 by making the state inclined obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal direction ( The first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are controlled to be in the open state (see the upper left figure in FIG. 143). That is, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are inclined in the oblique direction with respect to the surface of the game area 7, and the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are controlled to the open state. Further, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are moved so that the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B cover all or part of the first advance inlet 71 and the second advance inlet 72. Thus, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are controlled to be closed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 143, the first opening door 76 </ b> A and the second opening door 76 </ b> B that are integrally formed are opposed to the lower side of the second entrance 72 (in the example shown in FIG. 143, the second opening door 76 </ b> B A rotation shaft 76J is provided at the base portion), and the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B are configured to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 76J. A drive component (not shown in FIG. 143) is connected to the rotation shaft 76J of the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B that are integrally formed. When the opening solenoid 75 is driven by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), the driving component is driven by the opening solenoid 75, and the first opening door is counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 76J. 76A and the 2nd open door 76B are rotationally driven integrally, and the 1st open door 76A and the 2nd open door 76B will be in an open state. When the opening solenoid 75 is stopped by the CPU 56, the driving components are stopped by the opening solenoid 75, and the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B are rotated and driven in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft 76J. As a result, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are closed. It should be noted that the distal end portion 71c that is the most gaming area side of the first entrance 71 is located on the upper side so as not to interfere with the first opening door 76A when the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B are rotationally driven. It is formed in an arc shape so as to warp. Further, the root portion 76M of the first open door 76A is formed in an arc shape so as to protrude downward so as not to interfere with the distal end portion 71c of the first advancement inlet when rotating. With such a structure, when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the open state, the arc shape of the root portion 76M of the first open door 76A and the tip portion of the first entrance 71 The arc shape of 71c is overlapped (see the upper left figure in FIG. 143) so that the first advance inlet 71 and the first open door 76A do not interfere with each other, and the first advance inlet 71 and the first open in the open state. There is no gap between the door 76A and the game ball spilling out.

  Moreover, according to each embodiment shown above, the 1st entrance 71 is arrange | positioned so that it may be located below with respect to the 2nd entrance 72. With such an arrangement, the game ball that spills without entering the second entrance 72 is positioned directly below and is received by the first opening door 76A that is larger than the second opening door 76B. The structure is easy to enter the first entrance 71. Therefore, it is possible to allow a game ball that has flowed downward without entering the second entrance 72 to win the first entrance 71, and the first entrance 71 is compared with the second entrance 72. It is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter.

  The present invention includes variable display means for variably displaying identification information and deriving and displaying a display result, and a variable start winning device that changes between an open state in which game media can be won and a closed state in which game media cannot be won. In addition, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that changes the variable start winning device when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus from diagonally right above. It is the front view which looked at the structure part of the opening / closing mechanism part of the open door of a variable winning ball apparatus, and the movable mechanism part of a movable member and a decoration member from the front direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the structure part of the opening / closing mechanism part of the open door of a variable winning ball apparatus, and the movable mechanism part of a movable member and a decoration member from diagonally upward right. It is the front view which looked at the opening-and-closing mechanism part and movable mechanism part at the time of making an open door into an open state. It is the perspective view which looked at the opening-and-closing mechanism part and movable mechanism part at the time of making an open door into an open state from diagonally upward right. It is the front view which looked at the opening-and-closing mechanism part and movable mechanism part when a nut-like member moved to the lowermost part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the opening-and-closing mechanism part and movable mechanism part when a nut-like member moved to the lowermost part from diagonally right above. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st path | route provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect which stores the game ball which approached into the 1st entrance and was guide | induced from the 1st path | route. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect which cancelled | released the storage state of the game ball stored in the 1st storage part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd path | route provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd path | route provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the game ball after falling on the rotating body upper surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a game ball when a game ball falls on the upper surface of a rotary body at timings other than the timing at which a specific opening is located on the front side, and the timing at which the specific opening is located on the side facing the front side. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the normal variable winning ball apparatus from the upper right. It is the figure which looked at the normal variable winning ball apparatus from the front, the upper surface, the lower surface, and the side. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected and showed the normal variable winning ball apparatus in the longitudinal direction in the AA surface shown in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the cross section shown in FIG. 18 from the upper right. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of how to advance the game of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit / small hit determination table used for the big hit or the small hit determination of a special symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the common symbol determination table used for the determination per normal symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the classification determination table per common figure. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a common figure fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a reach determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal that constitute an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table in which the data regarding a starting operation state are set. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows rotary body control. It is a flowchart which shows a movable member control. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial position setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows the process after closing of the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a table which shows the number of time reductions set to a time reduction number counter by big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during normal electric-power-object opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration member control. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration member initial position control process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a display process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure loss display process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure corresponding | compatible production start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure corresponding | compatible production process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure corresponding | compatible production stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a small hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a small hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure loss display processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit effect process. It is a flowchart which shows special effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows special effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of abnormality alert | reported in alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of the approach and discharge | release of the game ball to a variable winning ball apparatus and the movable timing of a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of the approach and discharge | release of the game ball to a variable winning ball apparatus and the movable timing of a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of the approach and discharge | release of the game ball to a variable winning ball apparatus and the movable timing of a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of the approach and discharge | release of the game ball to a variable winning ball apparatus and the movable timing of a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display area in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display mode of the effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display timing of the fluctuation display result of a normal symbol, and the open timing of a normal variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing which performs the production | presentation corresponding to the fluctuation display of a normal symbol, the opening control of a normal variable winning ball apparatus, and the special symbol fluctuation display in an effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the command analysis process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure display process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure loss display process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure corresponding | compatible production start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure corresponding | compatible production stop process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a small hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a small hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure loss display process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit after-effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing which performs the production | presentation corresponding to the fluctuation | variation display of a normal symbol, the opening control of a normal variable winning ball apparatus, and the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol in the production | presentation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the other example of a normal variable winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing and the perspective view which show the other example of the opening / closing mechanism part of the open door of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing and a perspective view which show another example of the opening / closing mechanism part of the open door of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing and a perspective view which show another example of the opening / closing mechanism part of the open door of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing and a perspective view which show another example of the opening / closing mechanism part of the open door of a variable winning ball apparatus.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Production display device 10 Normal symbol display 16 Opening and closing board 20 Function (variable winning ball device)
23 Count switch 31 Main board 56 CPU
60 Start port switch 61 Ordinary variable winning ball device 63 Movable part 65 Decoration part 66 Specific opening 66a Specific area switch 66b Specific side side opening 67 Advance entrance 71 First passage opening 72 Second passage opening 71a First character winning combination switch 72a First 2nd prize winning switch 76A 1st opening door 76B 2nd opening door 77 Movable member 78 Decoration member 80 Production control board 85a Production body discharge switch 86 Rotating body 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (9)

Normal variable display means for variably displaying the identification information and displaying the display result, a variable start winning device that changes between an open state in which the game medium can be won and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be won, and the variable start Special variable display means for variably displaying special identification information based on the winning of game media in the winning device and displaying the display result, an open state in which game media can be won, and a closed state in which game media cannot be won and a special variable winning device that changes DOO, the common variable display means the variable start winning device when a specific display result is derived displayed is changed to the open discharge condition, the display predetermined in the special variable display means Based on the result being derived and displayed, the special variable winning device is changed to an open state, and a predetermined game is played based on the fact that a game medium has won the special variable winning device. A grant can be a game machine value,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling electrical parts for production according to the command transmitted by the game control means,
The game control means includes
Whether or not the display result derived and displayed on the normal variable display means is to be the specific display result is determined before the display result is derived and determined to be the specific display result based on the start condition being satisfied. Display whether the variable start winning device is in the first open state in which the game medium is easy to win, or in the second open state in which the game medium is difficult to win. A pre-determining means for deciding before the result display
Variable display pattern determination means for determining one variable display pattern from among variable display patterns of a plurality of types of identification information determined in advance based on the determination of the prior determination means;
A display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the pre-determining means, a variable display pattern command capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and a game medium winning in the variable start winning device And a command transmission means for transmitting a winning command that can be specified.
The effect control means includes effect execution means for executing an effect based on the command transmitted by the command transmission means,
The command transmission means includes
It is determined that the specific display result is determined by the predetermining means, and when the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state, and is determined as the specific display result by the predetermining means. And when the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state, a common winning command is transmitted,
The production execution means
Based on the winning command transmitted by the command transmitting means, it is determined by the prior determining means to be the specific display result and when the variable start winning device is determined to be in the first open state, A game machine characterized in that a common effect is executed when it is determined that the specific display result is determined by the pre-article determination means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. Normal variable display means for variably displaying the identification information and displaying the display result, a variable start winning device that changes between an open state in which the game medium can be won and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be won, and the variable start Special variable display means for variably displaying special identification information based on the winning of game media in the winning device and displaying the display result, an open state in which game media can be won, and a closed state in which game media cannot be won and a special variable winning device that changes DOO, the common variable display means the variable start winning device when a specific display result is derived displayed is changed to the open discharge condition, the display predetermined in the special variable display means Based on the result being derived and displayed, the special variable winning device is changed to an open state, and a predetermined game is played based on the fact that a game medium has won the special variable winning device. A grant can be a game machine value,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling electrical parts for production according to the command transmitted by the game control means,
The game control means includes
Whether or not the display result derived and displayed on the normal variable display means is to be the specific display result is determined before the display result is derived and determined to be the specific display result based on the start condition being satisfied. Display whether the variable start winning device is in the first open state in which the game medium is easy to win, or in the second open state in which the game medium is difficult to win. A pre-determining means for deciding before the result display
Variable display pattern determination means for determining one variable display pattern from among variable display patterns of a plurality of types of identification information determined in advance based on the determination of the prior determination means;
Display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the pre-determining means, variable display pattern command capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable start winning device being controlled to be in an open state Command transmitting means for transmitting a non-winning command that can specify that the game medium has not won to the variable start winning device when
The effect control means includes effect execution means for executing an effect based on the command transmitted by the command transmission means,
The command transmission means includes
When the variable start winning device is controlled to be in the open state based on the determination of the specific display result by the pre-determining means and the determination that the variable start winning device is in the first open state. When the game medium has not won the variable start winning device, it is determined that the specific display result is determined by the pre-determining means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. And when the game medium has not won the variable start winning device when the variable start winning device is controlled to be in an open state based on the non-winning command,
The production execution means
When the variable start winning device is controlled to be in the open state based on the determination of the specific display result by the pre-determining means and the determination that the variable start winning device is in the first open state. When the game medium has not won the variable start winning device, it is determined that the specific display result is determined by the pre-determining means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. A game machine characterized in that a common effect is executed when a game medium does not win the variable start winning device when the variable start winning device is controlled to be in an open state based on the game machine. Normal variable display means for variably displaying the identification information and displaying the display result, a variable start winning device that changes between an open state in which the game medium can be won and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be won, and the variable start Special variable display means for variably displaying special identification information based on the winning of game media in the winning device and displaying the display result, an open state in which game media can be won, and a closed state in which game media cannot be won and a special variable winning device that changes DOO, the common variable display means the variable start winning device when a specific display result is derived displayed is changed to the open discharge condition, the display predetermined in the special variable display means Based on the result being derived and displayed, the special variable winning device is changed to an open state, and a predetermined game is played based on the fact that a game medium has won the special variable winning device. A grant can be a game machine value,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling electrical parts for production according to the command transmitted by the game control means,
The game control means includes
Whether or not the display result derived and displayed on the normal variable display means is to be the specific display result is determined before the display result is derived and determined to be the specific display result based on the start condition being satisfied. Display whether the variable start winning device is in the first open state in which the game medium is easy to win, or in the second open state in which the game medium is difficult to win. A pre-determining means for deciding before the result display
Variable display pattern determination means for determining one variable display pattern from among variable display patterns of a plurality of types of identification information determined in advance based on the determination of the prior determination means;
A display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the pre-determining means, a variable display pattern command capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and a game medium winning in the variable start winning device And a command transmission means for transmitting a winning command that can be specified.
The effect control means includes effect execution means for executing an effect based on the command transmitted by the command transmission means,
The command transmission means includes
It is determined that the specific display result is determined not to be the specific display result by the pre-determining means, and is determined to be the specific display result by the pre-determining means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. And send a common variable display pattern command.
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the specific display result is obtained and when it is determined that the variable start winning device is in the second open state, it is determined by the pre-determining means that the specific display result is not set. Send a display result command different from the display result command to send
The production execution means
Executing a variable display effect corresponding to the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means;
The winning command is received after receiving the display result command which can be specified by the pre-determining means to be the specific display result and can be specified that the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. A game machine characterized by performing special effects when played. A detecting means for detecting a game medium won in the variable start winning device and outputting a detection signal;
The game control means includes an open state determination means for determining whether or not the variable start winning device is controlled to the open state,
The command transmission means is based on the fact that the detection means has detected the winning of the game medium when the variable start winning device is determined not to be controlled to the open state by the open state determining means. Send an abnormality notification command to instruct execution of notification,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the effect control means includes abnormality notification means for executing abnormality notification based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the command transmission means. The variable display pattern determining means is
Pattern type determining means for determining the variable display pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types using a random number for determining the variable display pattern type;
Pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information using a variable display pattern determining random number from among variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or claim 4. Variable display execution means for executing variable display of identification information in the normal variable display means corresponding to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means based on the establishment of the start condition;
Variable display result display control means for displaying the display result of variable display on the normal variable display means at the end of variable display by the variable display execution means;
After the display of the display result of the variable display by the variable display result display control means is finished when it is determined that the specific display result is determined by the prior determination means and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state. A variable start winning device opening control means for controlling the variable start winning device to a second open state,
The variable display result display control means includes:
When it is determined not to be the specific display result by the prior determination means, the display result of the variable display by the variable display result display control means is displayed for a first time,
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the specific display result is to be set and the variable start winning device is determined to be in the second open state, the variable display result by the variable display result display control means is set to the second display result. Time display,
The variable start winning device opening control means controls the variable start winning device to the second open state for a third time after the variable display result display control means displays the display result of the variable display for the second time,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein the first time is set to substantially the same time as a time obtained by adding the third time to the second time. With changing the special variable winning device in the open release state when the open display results special variable display means is derived displayed, when it is controlled to the special variable winning device is opened released state, the special variable A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the fact that a gaming medium has won a specific area among a plurality of areas provided in the winning device,
Based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information in the normal variable display means,
Corresponding to the specific display result after completion of variable display by the variable display executing means based on the determination of the specific display result by the pre-determining means and the determination that the variable start winning device is in the first open state. Specific control execution means for executing specific control to be performed,
When executing the variable display of the identification information to be executed based on the fact that it is determined not to be the specific display result by the prior determination means, the start condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information is ended. Based on that, the variable display of the following identification information can be executed,
When executing the variable display of the identification information to be executed based on the determination as the specific display result by the prior determination unit, after the variable display of the identification information is finished, the specific control execution unit further performs the variable display of the identification information. After completing the specific control, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the next identification information can be executed,
Production execution means
In a state where the game medium has not won the variable start winning device, an effect corresponding to the specific control is executed,
Wherein after the variable start winning device the open display result as a variable display result of the specific symbol-specific information based on the game medium has been finished in is derived displayed is controlled the special variable winning device is opened release state Perform the production corresponding to
When finished the effect corresponding to that being controlled the special variable winning device is opened release state, when the variable display of the identification information by the variable display execution means is running, the identification of the running After executing the special effect different according to the determination result of the prior determination unit for the variable display of information and the remaining time until the variable display result of the variable display time is derived and displayed, and after executing the special effect The game machine according to any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein an effect corresponding to variable display of the next identification information is executed. Based on establishment of a predetermined condition, an advantageous state control means for controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player is provided,
The pre-determining unit determines that the variable start winning device is set to the first open state with a higher probability when the advantageous state control unit is controlled to the advantageous state than when the advantageous state control unit is not controlled to the advantageous state. The game machine according to any one of claims 3 to 7. With changing the special variable winning device in the open release state when the open display results special variable display means is derived displayed, when it is controlled to the special variable winning device is opened released state, the special variable A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the fact that a gaming medium has won a specific area among a plurality of areas provided in the winning device,
Based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information in the normal variable display means,
Corresponding to the specific display result after completion of variable display by the variable display executing means based on the determination of the specific display result by the pre-determining means and the determination that the variable start winning device is in the first open state. Specific control execution means for executing specific control to be performed,
When executing the variable display of the identification information to be executed based on the fact that it is determined not to be the specific display result by the prior determination means, the start condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information is ended. Based on that, the variable display of the following identification information can be executed,
When executing the variable display of the identification information to be executed based on the determination as the specific display result by the prior determination unit, after the variable display of the identification information is finished, the specific control execution unit further performs the variable display of the identification information. After completing the specific control, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the next identification information can be executed,
The advantageous state control means, after controlling to the advantageous state, terminates the advantageous state based on the variable display of the special identification information a predetermined number of times,
Production execution means
In a state that is not controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means, a variable display effect and an effect corresponding to the specific control are executed,
In the state controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means, the variable display effect is not executed, and an effect state effect in an effect mode different from the variable display effect and the effect corresponding to the specific control is performed. Run,
After the advantageous state control means controls the advantageous state, the variable display executing means changes the identification information when the advantageous state effect is ended based on the variable display of the special identification information a predetermined number of times. If display is being performed, depending on the determination result of the predetermining means for the variable display of the identification information being executed and the remaining time until the variable display result of the variable display time is derived and displayed The game machine according to claim 8, wherein a different special effect is executed, and after the special effect is executed, an effect corresponding to a variable display of the next identification information is executed.